Cisco Systems Blender DOC 7812945= User Manual

Cis c o WAN Ma n a g e r Us e r’s Gu id e

Release 10.5

October 2002

Co rp o ra t e He a d q u a rt e rs

Cisco System s, Inc.

170 West Tasm an Drive

San J ose, CA 95134-1706

USA

http://www.cisco.com

Tel: 408 526-4000

800 553-NETS (6387)

Fax: 408 526-4100

Custom er Order Num ber: DOC-7812945=

Text Part Num ber: 78-12945-02

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O N T E N T S

Preface xxi

A u dience xxi

O r ganization xxi

R e lated D o cumentation xxii

C i sco W A N M a nager R e lease 10.5 D ocumentation xxii

C i sco M G X 8 850 R e lease 2.1 D o cumentation xxiii

C i sco M G X 8 950 R e lease 2.1 D o cumentation xxiv

S E S PNNI R e lease 1.1 D o cumentation xxiv

C i sco W A N S witching Software, R e lease 9.3 D ocumentation xxv

MGX 8850 Multiservice Switch, R e lease 1.1.40 D ocumentation xxv

MGX 8250 Edge Conc e ntrator, R e lease 1.1.40 D o cumentation xxvi

MGX 8230 Multiservice Gateway, R e lease 1.1.40 D ocumentation xxvii

D o cument C o nventions xxviii

O b taining D ocumentation xxix

World Wide Web xxix

D o cumentation C D -R OM xxix

O r dering D ocumentation xxix

D o cumentation F e edback xxx

O b taining T e chnical A s sistance xxx

C i sco.com xxx

T e chnical A s sistance C e nter xxx

C o ntacting T AC b y U s ing the C i sco T AC W e bsite xxxi

C o ntacting T AC b y T e lephone xxxi

C H A P T E R

C i sco W A N M a nager O v e rview 1-1

CWM R e lease 10 A p plications 1-1

C o nnection Manager 1-1

N e twork B r owser 1-2

Service C l ass T e m plate Manager 1-2

Statistics C o llection Manager 1-2

Security Manager 1-3

Wingz R e port and Summary R e port 1-3

C i sco V i ew 1-3

A d ditional C WM R e lease 10 A pplic a tions and F e atures 1-4

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

C o nfiguration Save and R e store 1-4

N e twork C o nfigurator 1-4

CWM t o C WM C o mmunications 1-4

A c cess to I GX, BPX, a nd M GX N e tworks 1-4

G r aceful Software and F i rmware D o wnload and U pgrades 1-5

P e rformance Management 1-5

O p en Management 1-5

Ev e nt Manager 1-6

N e twork T opology 1-6

C H A P T E R

Starting and Stopping C i sco W A N M a nager 2-1

Starting C i sco W A N M a nager 2-1

Starting C WM for t he F i rst T i me 2-1

P e rforming a Warm Start of C W M 2-3

P e rforming a C o ld Start of C W M 2-3

Stopping C i sco W A N M a nager 2-4

Stopping C WM 2-4

Stopping C WM a nd Powering O f f the C WM Work s tation 2-5

CWM M a in Menu 2-5

R e stricted A c cess U s ers 2-6

Starting H P Op e n V i ew 2-7

T h e C WM D e s k t op Window 2-7

CWM D e s k t op A p plications 2-8

Starting A dditional C W M GUIs

2-9

C H A P T E R

N e twork T o pology 3-1

T o pology Main Window 3-1

T i tle B a r 3-2

M e nu B a r 3-2

T o ol B a r 3-3

H i erarchy T r ee and G r aph 3-3

N e twork T opology V i ews 3-3

Status B a r 3-4

U s ing the Network T o pology Menus 3-4

F i le Menu 3-4

Save 3-5

Print 3-5

Exit 3-5

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

E d it Menu 3-5

G r oup 3-6

V i ew Menu 3-7

L a y e r 3-7

Z o om 3-8

B a ckground 3-9

Ov e rview Window 3-10

O p tions 3-10

A c tions Menu 3-11

N e twork 3-11

Node 3-12

T r unk 3-15

G r oup 3-15

A p ps Menu 3-16

C o nnection Manager 3-16

N e twork B r owser 3-16

Service C l ass T e m plate Manager 3-16

Statistics C o llection Manager 3-17

Security Manager 3-17

Summary R e port 3-17

Wingz R e port 3-17

C i sco V i ew 3-17

T o ols Menu 3-17

C o nfig Save and R e store 3-17

SW /F W Im a ges 3-18

A u dible A l arm Menu 3-18

C o nfiguration 3-18

A c knowledge 3-18

H e lp Menu 3-18

A b out 3-19

H e lp O n Icons /T r unks 3-19

H e lp O n C o lor 3-20

R i ght C l ick O p t ions 3-21

N a v ig a tion Submaps 3-22

N e twork Submenu 3-22

G r oup Submenu 3-23

Node Submenu 3-24

Save B u tton 3-25

Select B u tton 3-25

Z o om B u tton 3-25

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

Print Button 3-25

U s ing the H i erarchy T r e e 3-26

In t eraction with the H i e rarchy T r ee 3-26

N e twork A l a rm C o lors 3-26

C H A P T E R

C o nnection Manager 4-1

C o nnection Manager O v e rview 4-1

Supported C o nnection T yp e s 4-1

Supported C a rd T yp e s 4-2

Starting C o nnection Manager 4-2

Pl a tform, C a rd, and C o nnection T yp e s 4-4

Pl a tform T yp e s 4-4

C a rd T y p es 4-4

X P V C C o nnection T yp e s 4-5

C o nnection Manager Main Window 4-6

M e nu B a r 4-7

T o ol B a r 4-8

B u tton Panel 4-8

Start Node T r e e 4-8

F i lter Settings T r e e 4-8

L i st of C o nnections 4-8

Status B a r 4-8

A l arms and E v e nts 4-8

C o nfiguring C o nnections 4-9

C o nnection Modes 4-10

C o nfiguration Management 4-10

C o nnection Manager Window Menus 4-11

Supported C o nnection Service T y p es and P rotocols 4-13

F i lter Settings 4-18

Switch C o mpatibility 4-18

Supported C a rds 4-18

Fr a m e R e lay 4-18

ATM w ith P V C C o nnections 4-19

C i rcuit E mul a tion (CE) 4-19

V o ice 4-19

D a ta 4-20

R e al T i me V BR F e ature 4-20

N e twork Support 4-20

ATM S ervice Module Support 4-20

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

FR S er v ice Module Support 4-20

P V C C o nnections Supported by R e lease 10 of C WM 4-20

Modifying C o nnection Parameters 4-23

X P V C S upported C o nnections 4-31

SP V C & P V C p arameters for a Newly E s tablished X P V C 4-34

X P V C C o nnection and Segments 4-34

C H A P T E R

N e twork Browser 5-1

L a unching the Network B r owser 5-1

M a in Window 5-1

R o uting Nodes 5-4

C a rds 5-7

L i nes 5-9

Ports 5-10

R o uting T r unks 5-14

V i ew Menu 5-18

F i lters 5-19

F i lter Menu 5-19

Node Filter 5-20

T r unk F i lter 5-22

Node and T r unk T a bles 5-23

A c tions Menu 5-24

XL M I 5-24

C H A P T E R

Security Manager 6-1

Security Manager R e quirements 6-1

L a unching Security Manager 6-2

M e nu O p tions 6-3

B u tton O p t ions 6-4

N e w U s er 6-6

C r eating New Profiles 6-7

A c cess P rivil e ges 6-7

R e ad P rivileges 6-8

C r eate Privileges 6-8

Modify Privileges 6-8

D e lete Privileges 6-8

A l l Privileges 6-8

N e w P rofile 6-8

V i ew U s er 6-9

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

vii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

V i ew Profile 6-10

Modifying U s ers 6-11

D e leting U s ers 6-11

Modifying Profiles 6-12

D e leting Profiles 6-13

C o ntrolled A pplic a tions 6-13

C o nnection Manager 6-14

N e twork T opology 6-15

Statistics C o llection Manager 6-15

C H A P T E R

Service C l ass T e m plate Manager 7-1

S C T Ov e rview 7-1

VC D e scriptor 7-1

C o SB D e scriptor 7-1

S C T L o ad 7-2

Initializing S C T 7-2

Starting S C T 7-3

A s sociate S C T F i le with Interface 7-3

Window Interaction 7-5

F u nctional Interaction 7-5

M e nu B a r 7-5

T o ol B a r 7-6

N a v ig a tor P a nel 7-6

S C T T a b 7-7

Node T a b 7-7

Status B a r 7-7

B u tton Panel 7-7

Save A s 7-8

Save 7-8

D e lete 7-8

R e set 7-8

D o wnload 7-8

A s sociate 7-8

S C T D e letion 7-9

P a th L a bel 7-9

D a ta P a nel 7-9

VC P a nel 7-9

C o SB P a nel 7-15

C r eating a New Service C l ass T e mplate 7-17

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

viii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

L a unching the Service C l ass T e mplate Manager 7-17

N a v ig a ting the Service C l ass T e m plate Manager 7-18

S C T T a bles 7-19

E n try F i elds 7-20

C h anging S C T P a ra m e ters 7-20

U s ing the S C T T a bles 7-20

U s ing the E n try F i elds 7-22

R e set B u tton 7-23

A s sociate B u tton 7-23

Saving a New or Modified S C T 7-23

S C T R e fresh 7-24

D o wnloading a New S C T 7-24

V e rifying that a New S C T i s L o aded 7-24

S C T M a nager Maintenance 7-26

C H A P T E R

Statistics C o llection Manager 8-1

L a unching the Statistics C o llection Manager 8-1

M a in Window 8-1

S C M S tatistics D a tabase C o nfiguration 8-4

Statistic F i le C o nfiguration 8-5

Save Statistic F i les B u tton 8-5

Save to D i rectory 8-5

Purge File B u tton 8-5

Purge Interval (days) 8-6

Statistic D a tabase C o nfiguration 8-6

Purge Interval (hours) 8-6

Statistic F TP C o nfiguration 8-6

U s erna m e 8-6

P a ssword 8-6

C o nfirm Password 8-6

L a unching the S C M S tandalone C o llector 8-6

S C M S tatistics E n able 8-7

S C M S tatistics U p date 8-8

S C M S tatistics D i sable 8-9

S C M S tatistics C o llection 8-10

Stop Statistics C o llection 8-13

S C M Prim a ry /S econdary /T e rtiary 8-14

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

CWM-CWM Communic a tions 8-15

S C M CWM-CWM G a teway Support 8-15

T i me Sync 8-15

S C M I n band and O u t -of-band 8-15

S C M D u al C o llectors for L e gacy Nodes 8-16

S C M H i story F i les C o llection 8-16

G r oup Nodes by Platform 8-16

Node V i ew 8-16

Window R e fresh 8-17

C a rd F a milies 8-17

C o nfiguring Statistics C o llection 8-28

H o w Statistics are U s ed 8-29

C H A P T E R

Summary R e port and Wingz R e port 9-1

Ov e rview of Summary R e ports and Wingz R e ports 9-1

L a unching WingZ R e ports 9-2

Statistics Menu 9-2

R a w D a ta R e port O p t ion 9-2

R e move non-active Node O p t ion 9-2

Initialize O p tion 9-2

R a w D a ta R e ports 9-3

R e m ove Non-Active Nodes 9-4

Initialize 9-4

D e lete Statistical R e cords 9-4

L a unching Summary R e ports 9-5

C o nfiguring Summary R e ports 9-5

N e twork R e port 9-7

T o p U t ilization R e ports 9-8

R e port D e finition Pane 9-9

C o nnection T r affic Summary 9-9

Select C o nnection for R e port Pane 9-11

R e port T y p e Pane 9-12

R e sult Pane 9-13

C o nnection T r affic D r opped Window 9-13

T r unk T r affic Summary Window 9-15

Select T runk for Report Pane 9-17

R e port T y p e Pane 9-18

R e sult Pane 9-18

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

Port T r affic Summary Window 9-19

Select Port for R e port Pane 9-20

R e port T y p e Pane 9-21

R e sult Pane 9-22

Plot Button 9-22

C a ncel B u tton 9-22

C H A P T E R 1 0

N e twork C o nfigurator 10-1

H o w to Start the C o nfigurator 10-1

A d ding Nodes 10-1

D e leting Nodes 10-2

Modifying Nodes 10-2

C o mmunity String C o nfiguration 10-3

To C o nfigure C o mmunity Strings: 10-3

C H A P T E R 1 1

CWM to CWM Communi c ations 11-1

CWM Dom a in 11-1

CWMG a teway P rocess 11-2

CWMG a teway F u nctionality 11-2

E s tablishing Primary C WM a nd Secondary C WM Priority 11-3

R e -establishing Priority after C WM-CWM Communic a tions have been Interrupted 11-3

Primary C W M Graceful Shutdown 11-3

Secondary C WM G r aceful Shutdown 11-4

C o nfiguring C W M-CWM Communications 11-4

D e grade Mode 11-6

R e covering F rom D e grade Mode 11-6

F a ilure D e tection 11-6

U n expected E xit of t he Primary C WMG a teway 11-7

U n expected E xit of t he Secondary C WMG a teway 11-7

Primary C W M has lost IP or physical connectivity to all Secondary C WMs 11-7

O n e Secondary C WM h a s lost I P connectivity with the Primary C WM 11-9

T h e C WM G a teway process dies on the Primary and is N O T r estarted by watchdog 11-9

T h e C WM Work s tation C r ashed or was Powered-off (D i saster R e covery) 11-11

T h e Primary C WM h as lost IP or physical connectivity with the only Secondary C WM in a

domain 11-12

L o ss of H e artbeat from Primary C W MG a teway 11-14

R e v iew of Warm and C o ld Start of C WM 11-15

P e rforming a Warm Start of C W M 11-15

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

P e rforming a C o ld Start of C W M 11-15

L i mitations for C WM t o C WM Communications 11-16

E n abling C WM t o C WM Communications 11-16

Steps for E x e cuting the usertbl D B s ync and usertbl D B c mp Scripts 11-17

C H A P T E R 1 2

D o wnloading Software and F i rmware 12-1

In t roduction 12-1

Wh e re to G e t Switch Images for D o wnloading 12-1

Preparing the IP X /B PX Switch to D o wnload Software or F i rmware 12-2

D o wnloading Switch Software or F i rmware F r om the C WM Work s tation to a Switch 12-3

Im a ge F i lename C o nventions 12-3

IGX a nd B PX Conv e ntions 12-3

MGX Conv e ntions 12-3

Monitoring a D ownload Session on B PX a nd I G X Nodes 12-4

C H A P T E R 1 3

Saving and R e storing Node C o nfigurations 13-1

Saving Node C o nfigurations F r om C WM 13-1

C o nfig R e store from C WM 13-3

Switch C LI S a v e a nd R e store 13-4

Saving Node C o nfigurations for B PX a nd I G X Nod e s 13-4

R e storing Node C o nfigurations 13-8

A P P E N D I X

Internet C o nnectivity A-1

Ov e rview A-1

F u nctional D e scription A-2

P X M A-2

IP R o uter A-3

IP Ho s t A-5

Pu t ting It A l l T o gether A-5

S V C C o nnections A-6

Sample C o nfiguration O ne A-7

MGX 8850 Configuration A-7

R o uter C o nfiguration A-7

Sample C o nfiguration 2 A-8

MGX 8850 Configuration A-8

R o uter C o nfiguration A-8

PNNI L i nk A-9

From t he A X S M A-9

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

From t he P X M A-9

A P P E N D I X

N e tworking B-1

C o nnecting to C i sco W A N M a nager B-1

C i sco W A N M a nager G a teway N ode B-1

IP R e lay B-2

IP R e lay G a teway B-2

L i nk0 a nd L i nk1 B-2

Ports U s ed by C WM B-2

CWM t o Node (Outgoing) B-2

Node to C WM (Incoming) B-3

C o nfiguring Network Management B-3

In-B a nd Management B-3

In-B a nd Management Without R o uters B-3

In-B a nd Management A c ross R o uters B-7

O u t-of-B a nd Management B-10

CWM Ou t -of-B a nd M a nage m e nt for M G X 8 850 (rel2) B-11

C o nfiguring an M G X 8 850 F e eder Session B-11

U s er C o nfigurable Network I D s B-13

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xiii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xiv

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

T A B L E S

T a ble 1

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide Organization xxi

Cisco WAN Manager Release 10.5 Documentation xxii

WAN CiscoView Release 10 Documentation xxiii

Cisco MGX 8850 Switch Release 2.1 Documentation xxiii

Cisco MGX 8950 Switch Release 2.1 Documentation xxiv

SES PNNI Controller Release 1.1 Documentation xxiv

Cisco WAN Switching Release 9.3 Documentation xxv

MGX 8850 Multiservice Gateway Documentation xxvi

MGX 8250 Multiservice Gateway Documentation xxvi

MGX 8230 Multiservice Gateway Documentation xxvii

CWM Main Menu Options 2-6

Supported Card Types in CWM 4-2

ATM Connection and Protocol Types 4-14

ATM (RPM) Connection and Protocol Types 4-15

Frame Relay Connection and Protocol Types 4-15

CE Connection and Protocol Types 4-17

Voice and Data Connection and Protocol Types 4-17

VISM Connection and Protocol Types 4-17

Private Line Connection and Protocol Types 4-18

PVC Connections Types 4-21

Card Types 4-22

Card Types 4-23

Three Segment XPVC 4-32

Two Segment XPVC 4-33

Cards Table- Type Information 5-7

Node and Trunk Table Information 5-23

Applications and Access Privileges 6-7

Desktop Application Security Matrix 6-14

HP OpenView Applications Security Matrix 6-14

UNIX Prompt Applications Security Matrix 6-14

Connection Manager Access Privileges 6-15

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tables

Topology Access Privileges 6-15

SCM Access Privileges 6-15

Buttons Enable Matrix 7-7

Statistics Collection Parameters (modifiable) 8-28

Time Input Type 9-4

Required Statistics for Top Utilized Trunks Report 9-8

Required Statistics for Connection Traffic Summary Report 9-11

Required Statistics for Connection Traffic Dropped Report 9-15

Required Statistics for Trunk Traffic Summary Report 9-17

Required Statistics for Port Traffic Summary 9-20

Outgoing Ports Used by CWM B-2

Incoming Ports Used by CWM B-3

Results of netstat-rn Command B-5

Node Configuration (IGX2) B-5

Node Configuration (MGX) B-6

Node Configuration (IGX3) B-6

Node Configuration (MGX8220) B-7

Results of netstat -rn Command B-9

Node Configuration (IGX2) B-9

Node Configuration (MGX1) B-9

Node Configuration (IGX3) B-10

Node Configuration (MGX2) B-10

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xvi

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

F I G U R E S

CWM Main Menu 2-6

CWM Desktop Window 2-8

Network Topology Display 3-2

File Menu Options 3-4

Edit Menu 3-6

View Menu- Layer Submenu 3-7

View Menu- Zoom Submenu 3-9

View Menu- Background Submenu 3-10

Actions Menu- Network Submenu 3-12

Actions Menu- Node Submenu 3-14

XPVC Preferred Table Configurator 3-14

XPVC Edit Entry 3-15

XPVC Edit Entry Network 3-15

Apps Menu 3-16

Help Menu 3-19

Help On Icons/Trunks 3-20

Help On Color 3-21

Navigation Submaps 3-22

Network Submenu 3-23

Group Submenu 3-24

Node Submenu 3-25

Expanded View of Network Topology Hierarchy 3-26

CWM Desktop Window 4-3

CWM Connection Manager Window 4-4

XPVC Connection and Segments 4-35

ATM to ATM Connection 4-35

Filter Settings, Dangling Segments of XPVC 4-36

Filter Settings Service Type 4-36

Network Browser Main Window 5-2

Network Browser Root Node Expanded 5-3

Routing Nodes and Routing Trunks 5-4

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xvii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figures

Routing Nodes Expanded in Left Panel of Window 5-5

Routing Node Information Displayed in Right Panel of Window 5-6

Routing Node’s Network Elements 5-7

Cards for a Selected Node Displayed in the Left Panel 5-8

Information for a Selected Card Displayed in the Right Panel 5-9

Line Information 5-10

Port Information 5-11

Feeder Nodes 5-12

Feeder Node’s Network Elements 5-13

Feeder Trunks 5-14

Routing Trunks- Status Information 5-15

Routing Trunks- General Information 5-16

Routing Trunks- Line Information 5-17

Routing Trunks- All Information Displayed 5-18

View Menu 5-19

Filter Menu 5-20

Node Filter- Protocol 5-21

Node Filter- Type 5-21

Node Filter- Synchronized 5-21

Trunk Filter- Alarm 5-22

Trunk Filter- Type 5-22

Actions Menu- Cisco View 5-24

XLMI Links- Status 5-25

XLMI Links- Remote Information 5-26

XLMI Links- All 5-27

XLMI Enabled 5-28

Accessing Security Manager 6-2

New User window 6-3

The View Menu Option 6-4

All Profiles window 6-5

All Users window 6-5

Refresh window 6-6

New Profile window 6-9

View User window 6-10

View Profile Window 6-11

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xviii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figures

Modify User window 6-12

Modify Profile window 6-13

SCT Main window 7-3

Data Flow Through Two Cards Connected Across a Bus 7-4

Close-up of Service Class Template Manager icon 7-17

CWM Apps Menu view 7-18

Service Class Template Manager with Policy selected 7-19

Service Class Template Manager with VC Threshold Selected 7-20

SCT Manager with a Service Category Field selected 7-21

SCT Manager with CAC Treatment field selected 7-22

SCT Manager with ABR.1 Selected 7-23

Statistics Collection Manager Main Window 8-2

Stats Database Hosts 8-3

Stats DB Configuration Option 8-4

Stats DB Host Configuration 8-5

SCM Stand Alone initialization 8-7

SCM start core, stop core, and exit options 8-7

Statistics Enable Dialog 8-8

Update Stats enabling information 8-8

Disabling Stats 8-9

Statistics Disabling complete 8-10

Start Statistics Collection 8-11

Statistics Collection configuration 8-11

Statistics Collection started 8-12

.Pending and completed stats files information 8-12

Stats File summary information 8-13

Stop Stats collection 8-14

Stop Stats collection confirmation 8-14

Nodes grouped by platform 8-17

CWM Statistics Window 9-2

Raw Data Report Window 9-3

Network Report Window 9-7

Top Utilization Report Window 9-8

Connection Traffic Summary Window 9-10

Connection Traffic Dropped Window 9-14

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xix

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figures

Trunk Traffic Summary Window 9-16

Port Traffic Summary Window 9-19

In Progress window 13-2

Configuration Save window 13-3

Configuration Restore window 13-4

cnfswfunc Command Output 13-5

dspcnf Command Output 13-6

savecnf Command Output 13-7

Typical Network Application A-1

MGX 8850 Release 2 IP Connectivity A-2

IPATM Custom Interface for VxWorks A-3

SVC Interface Between IPATM and Routers A-4

IP Connectivity Between MGX 8850 Release 2 and IP workstation A-5

In-Band Management - Basic Hub Attachment Without Router B-4

In-Band Management Using an IP Relay Gateway B-7

Out-of-Band Management B-11

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preface

The Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide describes how to use the Cisco WAN Manager Release 10

software.

Audience

This guide is designed for system administrators and users who are responsible for the operation of the

Cisco WAN Manager application.

Organization

The major sections of this document are as follows:

Table 1

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide Organization

Chapter Title

Description

Chapter 1, Cisco WAN Manager Overview

Provides an overview of the CiscoWAN Manager (CWM)

product.

Chapter 2, Starting and Stopping Cisco WAN Manager Describes how to start and stop CWM, using the main menu and

using the CWM desktop.

Chapter 3, Network Topology

Chapter 4, Connection Manager

Describes the CWM Network Topology.

Describes how to use the CWM Connection Manager

application and describes Connection Types and Service Types.

Chapter 5, Network Browser

Describes how to use the CWM Network Browser.

Chapter 6, Security Manager

Describes how to use the CWM Security Manager application.

Chapter 7, Service Class Template Manager

Describes how to use the CWM Service Class Template

application.

Chapter 8, Statistics Collection Manager

Chapter 9, Summary Report and Wingz

Chapter 10, Network Configurator

Describes how to use the CWM Statistics Collection Manager

application.

Describes the CWM Summary Report application and the

Wingz Report application.

Describes how to use the CWM Network Configurator

application.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xxi

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preface

Related Documentation

Table 1

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide Organization (continued)

Chapter Title

Description

Chapter 11, CWM to CWM Communications

Describes the implementation of communications between two

or more CWM workstations.

Chapter 12, Downloading Software and Firmware

Describes downloading software and firmware.

Chapter 13, Saving and Restoring Node Configurations Describes the save and restore configuration node commands.

Appendix A, Internet Connectivity

Appendix B, Networking

Describes CWM Internet connectivity.

Describes Networking with CWM.

Related Documentation

The following Cisco publications contain additional information related to the operation of this product

and associated equipment in a Cisco WAN switching network.

Cisco WAN Manager Release 10.5 Documentation

The product documentation for the Cisco WAN Manager (CWM) network management system for

Release 10.5 is listed in T a ble 2.

Table 2

Cisco WAN Manager Release 10.5 Docum entation

Title

Description

Cisco WAN Manager Installation Guide for Solaris, Provides procedures for installing Release 10 of the CWM network

Release 10.5

management system and Release 5.3 of CiscoView.

DOC-7812948=

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide, Release 10.5

DOC-7812945=

Describes how to use the CWM Release 10 software which consists of

user applications and tools for network management, connection

management, network configuration, statistics collection, and security

management.

Cisco WAN Manager SNMP Service Agent,

Release 10.5

Provides information about the CWM Simple Network Management

Protocol Service Agent, an optional adjunct to CWM used for

managing Cisco WAN switches using SNMP.

DOC-7812947=

Cisco WAN Manager Database Interface Guide,

Release 10.5

Provides information about accessing the CWM Informix OnLine

database that is used to store information about the network elements.

DOC-7812944=

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xxii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preface

Related Documentation

Table 3

WAN CiscoView Release 10 Docum entation

Title

Description

WAN CiscoView Release 3 for the MGX 8850 Edge Switch, Provides instructions for using this network management

Release 1

software application that allows you to perform minor

configuration and troubleshooting tasks.

DOC-7811242=

WAN CiscoView Release 3 for the MGX 8250 Edge

Concentrator, Release 1

Provides instructions for using this network management

software application that allows you to perform minor

configuration and troubleshooting tasks.

DOC-7811241=

WAN CiscoView Release 3 for the MGX 8230

Multiservice Gateway, Release 1

Provides instructions for using this network management

software application that allows you to perform minor

configuration and troubleshooting tasks.

DOC-7810926=

Cisco MGX 8850 Release 2.1 Documentation

The product documentation for the installation and operation of the MGX 8850 Release 2.1 switch is

listed in Table 4.

Table 4

Cisco MGX 8850 Sw itch Release 2.1 Docum entation

Title

Description

Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Hardware Installation

Guide, Release 2.1

Describes how to install the MGX 8850 routing switch. It

explains what the switch does, and covers site preparation,

grounding, safety, card installation, and cabling.

DOC-7812561=

Cisco MGX 8850 and MGX 8950 Switch Command

Reference, Release 2.1

Describes how to use the commands that are available in the

CLI¹of the MGX 8850 and MGX 8950 switches.

DOC-7812563=

Cisco MGX 8850 and MGX 8950 Switch Software

Configuration Guide, Release 2.1

Describes how to configure the MGX 8850 and the MGX 8950

switches to operate as ATM edge and core switches. This guide

also provides some operation and maintenance procedures.

DOC-7812551=

Cisco MGX 8850 and MGX 8950 SNMP Reference,

Release 2.1

Provides information on all supported MIB²objects, support

restrictions, traps, and alarms for the AXSM, PXM45, and RPM.

PNNI is also supported.

DOC-7812562=

Cisco MGX and SES PNNI Network Planning Guide

DOC-7813543=

Provides guidelines for planning a PNNI network that uses the

MGX 8850 and the MGX 8950 switches and the BPX 8600

switches. When connected to a PNNI network, each BPX 8600

series switch requires a Service Expansion Shelf (SES) for PNNI

route processing.

Cisco MGX Route Processor Module Installation and

Configuration Guide, Release 2.1

Describes how to install and configure the MGX Route Processor

Module (RPM-PR) in the MGX 8850 and MGX 8950 Release 2.1

switch. Also provides site preparation, troubleshooting,

maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and basic IOS

configuration information.

DOC-7812510=

1. CLI = command line interface

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xxiii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preface

Related Documentation

2. MIB = Management Information Base

Cisco MGX 8950 Release 2.1 Documentation

The product documentation for the installation and operation of the MGX 8950 Release 2.1 switch is

listed in Table 5.

Table 5

Cisco MGX 8950 Sw itch Release 2.1 Docum entation

Title

Description

Cisco MGX 8950 Switch Hardware Installation Guide, Describes how to install the MGX 8950 core switch. It explains

Release 2.1

what the switch does, and covers site preparation, grounding,

safety, card installation, and cabling.

DOC-7812564=

Cisco MGX 8850 and MGX 8950 Switch Command

Reference, Release 2.1

Describes how to use the commands that are available in the CLI

of the MGX 8850 and MGX 8950 switches.

DOC-7812563=

Cisco MGX 8850 and MGX 8950 SNMP Reference,

Release 2.1

Provides information on all supported MIB objects, support

restrictions, traps, and alarms for the AXSM, PXM45, and RPM.

PNNI is also supported.

DOC-7812562=

Cisco MGX and SES PNNI Network Planning Guide

DOC-7813543=

Provides guidelines for planning a PNNI network that uses the

MGX 8850 and the MGX 8950 switches and the BPX 8600

switches. When connected to a PNNI network, each BPX 8600

series switch requires a SES¹for PNNI route processing.

Cisco MGX Route Processor Module Installation and

Configuration Guide, Release 2.1

Describes how to install and configure the MGX Route Processor

Module (RPM-PR) in the MGX 8850 and MGX 8950 Release 2.1

switch. Also provides site preparation, troubleshooting,

maintenance, cable and connector specifications, and basic IOS

configuration information.

DOC-7812510=

1. SES = Service Expansion Shelf

SES PNNI Release 1.1 Documentation

The product documentation that contains information for the understanding, the installation, and the

operation of the Service Expansion Shelf (SES) PNNI Controller is listed in Table 6.

Table 6

SES PNNI Controller Release 1.1 Docum entation

Title

Description

Cisco SES PNNI Controller Software Configuration Guide, Describes how to configure, operate, and maintain the SES

Release 1.1

PNNI Controller.

DOC-7813539=

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xxiv

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preface

Related Documentation

Table 6

SES PNNI Controller Release 1.1 Docum entation (continued)

Title

Description

Cisco SES PNNI Controller Software Command Reference, Provides a description of the commands used to configure and

Release 1.1

operate the SES PNNI Controller.

DOC-7813541=

Cisco MGX and SES PNNI Network Planning Guide

DOC-7813543=

Provides guidelines for planning a PNNI network that uses the

MGX 8850 and the MGX 8950 switches and the BPX 8600

switches. When connected to a PNNI network, each BPX 8600

series switch requires a SES for PNNI route processing.

Cisco WAN Switching Software, Release 9.3 Documentation

The product documentation for the installation and operation of the Cisco WAN Switching Software

Release 9.3 is listed in Table 7.

Table 7

Cisco WAN Sw itching Release 9.3 Docum entation

Title

Description

Cisco BPX 8600 Series Installation and Configuration,

Release 9.3.30

Provides a general description and technical details of the

BPX broadband switch.

DOC-7812907=

Cisco WAN Switching Command Reference, Release 9.3.30

DOC-7812906=

Provides detailed information on the general command line

interface commands.

Cisco IGX 8400 Series Installation Guide, Release 9.3.30

OL-1165-01 (online only)

Provides hardware installation and basic configuration

information for IGX 8400 Series switches running Switch

Software Release 9.3.30 or earlier.

Cisco IGX 8400 Series Provisioning Guide, Release 9.3.30

Provides information for configuration and provisioning of

selected services for the IGX 8400 Series switches running

Switch Software Release 9.3.30 or earlier.

OL-1166-01 (online only)

Cisco IGX 8400 Series Regulatory Compliance and Safety

Information

Provides regulatory compliance, product warnings, and

safety recommendations for the IGX 8400 Series switch.

DOC-7813227=

MGX 8850 Multiservice Switch, Release 1.1.40 Documentation

The product documentation that contains information for the installation and operation of the MGX 8850

Multiservice Switch is listed in Table 8.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xxv

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preface

Related Documentation

Table 8

Title

MGX 8850 Multiservice Gateway Docum entation

Description

Cisco MGX 8850 Multiservice Switch Installation and

Configuration, Release 1.1.3

Provides installation instructions for the MGX 8850 multiservice

switch.

DOC-7811223=

Cisco MGX 8800 Series Switch Command Reference,

Release 1.1.3.

Provides detailed information on the general command line for

the MGX 8850 switch.

DOC-7811210=

Cisco MGX 8800 Series Switch System Error Messages, Provides error message descriptions and recovery procedures.

Release 1.1.3

DOC-7811240=

Cisco MGX 8850 Multiservice Switch Overview,

Release 1.1.3

Provides a technical description of the system components and

functionary of the MGX 8850 multiservice switch from a

technical perspective.

OL-1154-01 (online only)

Cisco MGX Route Processor Module Installation and

Configuration Guide, Release 1.1

Describes how to install and configure the MGX Route Processor

Module (RPM/B and RPM-PR) in the MGX 8850, MGX 8250,

and MGX 8230 Release 1 switch. Also provides site preparation,

troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and connector

DOC-7812278=

specifications, and basic IOS configuration information.

1.1.40 Version Software Release Notes Cisco WAN

MGX 8850, MGX 8230, and MGX 8250 Switches

Provides new feature, upgrade, and compatibility information, as

well as known and resolved anomalies.

DOC-7813594=

MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator, Release 1.1.40 Documentation

The documentation that contains information for the installation and operation of the MGX 8250 Edge

Concentrator is listed in Table 9.

Table 9

MGX 8250 Multiservice Gateway Docum entation

Title

Description

Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Installation and

Configuration, Release 1.1.3

Provides installation instructions for the MGX 8250 Edge

Concentrator.

DOC-7811217=

Cisco MGX 8250 Multiservice Gateway Command

Reference, Release 1.1.3

Provides detailed information on the general command line

interface commands.

DOC-7811212=

Cisco MGX 8250 Multiservice Gateway Error Messages,

Release 1.1.3

Provides error message descriptions and recovery procedures.

DOC-7811216=

Cisco MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Overview,

Release 1.1.3

Describes the system components and functionality of the

MGX 8250 edge concentrator from a technical perspective.

DOC-7811576=

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xxvi

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preface

Related Documentation

Table 9

MGX 8250 Multiservice Gateway Docum entation (continued)

Title

Description

Cisco MGX Route Processor Module Installation and

Configuration Guide, Release 1.1

Describes how to install and configure the MGX Route

Processor Module (RPM/B and RPM-PR) in the MGX 8850,

MGX 8250, and MGX 8230 Release 1 switch. Also provides

site preparation, troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and

connector specifications, and basic IOS configuration

information.

DOC-7812278=

1.1.40 Version Software Release Notes Cisco WAN

MGX 8850, MGX 8230, and MGX 8250 Switches

Provides new feature, upgrade, and compatibility information,

as well as known and resolved anomalies.

DOC-7813594=

MGX 8230 Multiservice Gateway, Release 1.1.40 Documentation

The documentation that contains information for the installation and operation of the MGX 8230 Edge

Concentrator is listed in Table 10.

Table 10

MGX 8230 Multiservice Gateway Docum entation

Title

Description

Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Installation and

Configuration, Release 1.1.3

Provides installation instructions for the MGX 8230 Edge

Concentrator.

DOC-7811215=

Cisco MGX 8230 Multiservice Gateway Command

Reference, Release 1.1.3

Provides detailed information on the general command line

interface commands.

DOC-7811211=

Cisco MGX 8230 Multiservice Gateway Error Messages, Provides error message descriptions and recovery procedures.

Release 1.1.3

DOC-78112113=

Cisco MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Overview,

Release 1.1.3

Provides a technical description of the system components and

functionary of the MGX 8250 edge concentrator from a

technical perspective.

DOC-7812899=

Cisco MGX Route Processor Module Installation and

Configuration Guide, Release 1.1

Describes how to install and configure the MGX Route

Processor Module (RPM/B and RPM-PR) in the MGX 8850,

MGX 8250, and MGX 8230 Release 1 switch. Also provides site

preparation, troubleshooting, maintenance, cable and connector

specifications, and basic IOS configuration information.

DOC-7812278=

1.1.40 Version Software Release Notes Cisco WAN

MGX 8850, MGX 8230, and MGX 8250 Switches

Provides new feature, upgrade, and compatibility information,

as well as known and resolved anomalies.

DOC-7813594=

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xxvii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preface

Related Documentation

Document Conventions

This document uses the following conventions and terminology:

•

pointer—indicates where the mouse action is to occur

select—push and hold the left mouse button

release—let up on a mouse button to initiate an action

click—select and release a mouse button without moving the pointer

double-click—click a mouse button twice quickly without moving the pointer

drag—move the pointer by sliding the mouse with one or more buttons selected

CWM software supports a three-button mouse. The buttons have the following configurations:

•

left button—selects objects and activates controls

middle button—adjusts a selected group of objects, adds, or deselects a part of the group

right button—displays and selects options from menus

Users can customize these buttons in an alternative manner.

In situations that allow the user to select more than one item from a list simultaneously, the following

actions are supported:

•

To select a single item in a list, click on the entry. To deselect a single item, click a second time on

the previously selected entry.

•

To select a contiguous block of items, click on the first entry; without releasing the mouse button,

drag to the last desired entry and release. A subsequent click anywhere on the screen deselects all

previous selections.

•

To add an item to a selected group, press Shift and click on the entry at the end of the group to be

added.

To add a non-contiguous entry to the selection group, press Ctrl and click on the entry.

The following elements are in boldface:

•

menu names

buttons

drop-down lists

keyboard names

Words and characters that are displayed in terminal sessions and on-screen are printed in screen font.

When set off from the main text, words and characters that the user enters are printed in boldface screen

font.

Word or character strings enclosed in angle brackets < > indicate that users substitute their own

character string for the example presented in the text. When referenced in body text, the word is in

boldface (not screen font). See the following examples:

•

password: <rootpassword>—Enter the password in place of the character string <rootpassword>.

Command descriptions use the following conventions:

•

Commands and keywords are in boldface.

Arguments that require values are in italic.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xxviii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preface

Obtaining Documentation

•

Required command arguments are inside angle brackets < >.

Optional command arguments are in square brackets [ ].

Alternative keywords are separated by vertical bars ( | ).

Examples use the following conventions:

•

Terminal sessions and system displays are in screen font.

Information users enter is in boldface screen font.

Non-printing characters, such as passwords, are in angle brackets < >.

Default responses to system prompts are in square brackets [ ].

Obtaining Documentation

The following sections provide sources for obtaining documentation from Cisco Systems.

World Wide Web

You can access the most current Cisco documentation on the World Wide Web at the following sites:

•

http://www.cisco.com

http://www-china.cisco.com

http://www-europe.cisco.com

Documentation CD-ROM

Cisco documentation and additional literature are available in a CD-ROM package, which ships

with your product. The Documentation CD-ROM is updated monthly and may be more current than

printed documentation. The CD-ROM package is available as a single unit or as an annual subscription.

Ordering Documentation

Cisco documentation is available in the following ways:

•

Registered Cisco Direct Customers can order Cisco Product documentation from the Networking

Products MarketPlace:

http://www.cisco.com/cgi-bin/order/order_root.pl

Registered Cisco.com users can order the Documentation CD-ROM through the online Subscription

Store:

http://www.cisco.com/go/subscription

Nonregistered Cisco.com users can order documentation through a local account representative by

calling Cisco corporate headquarters (California, USA) at 408 526-7208 or, in North America, by

calling 800 553-NETS(6387).

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xxix

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preface

Obtaining Technical Assistance

Documentation Feedback

If you are reading Cisco product documentation on the World Wide Web, you can submit technical

comments electronically. Click Feedback in the toolbar and select Documentation. After you complete

the form, click Submit to send it to Cisco.

You can e-mail your comments to [email protected].

To submit your comments by mail, for your convenience many documents contain a response card

behind the front cover. Otherwise, you can mail your comments to the following address:

Cisco Systems, Inc.

Document Resource Connection

170 West Tasman Drive

San Jose, CA 95134-9883

We appreciate your comments.

Obtaining Technical Assistance

Cisco provides Cisco.com as a starting point for all technical assistance. Customers and partners can

obtain documentation, troubleshooting tips, and sample configurations from online tools. For Cisco.com

registered users, additional troubleshooting tools are available from the TAC website.

Cisco.com

Cisco.com is the foundation of a suite of interactive, networked services that provides immediate, open

access to Cisco information and resources at anytime, from anywhere in the world. This highly

integrated Internet application is a powerful, easy-to-use tool for doing business with Cisco.

Cisco.com provides a broad range of features and services to help customers and partners streamline

business processes and improve productivity. Through Cisco.com, you can find information about Cisco

and our networking solutions, services, and programs. In addition, you can resolve technical issues with

online technical support, download and test software packages, and order Cisco learning materials and

merchandise. Valuable online skill assessment, training, and certification programs are also available.

Customers and partners can self-register on Cisco.com to obtain additional personalized information and

services. Registered users can order products, check on the status of an order, access technical support,

and view benefits specific to their relationships with Cisco.

To access Cisco.com, go to the following website:

http://www.cisco.com

Technical Assistance Center

The Cisco TAC website is available to all customers who need technical assistance with a Cisco product

or technology that is under warranty or covered by a maintenance contract.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xxx

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preface

Obtaining Technical Assistance

Contacting TAC by Using the Cisco TAC Website

If you have a priority level 3 (P3) or priority level 4 (P4) problem, contact TAC by going to the TAC

website:

http://www.cisco.com/tac

P3 and P4 level problems are defined as follows:

•

P3—Your network performance is degraded. Network functionality is noticeably impaired, but most

business operations continue.

•

P4—You need information or assistance on Cisco product capabilities, product installation, or basic

product configuration.

In each of the above cases, use the Cisco TAC website to quickly find answers to your questions.

To register for Cisco.com, go to the following website:

http://www.cisco.com/register/

If you cannot resolve your technical issue by using the TAC online resources, Cisco.com registered users

can open a case online by using the TAC Case Open tool at the following website:

http://www.cisco.com/tac/caseopen

Contacting TAC by Telephone

If you have a priority level 1(P1) or priority level 2 (P2) problem, contact TAC by telephone and

immediately open a case. To obtain a directory of toll-free numbers for your country, go to the following

website:

http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/687/Directory/DirTAC.shtml

P1 and P2 level problems are defined as follows:

•

P1—Your production network is down, causing a critical impact to business operations if service is

not restored quickly. No workaround is available.

•

P2—Your production network is severely degraded, affecting significant aspects of your business

operations. No workaround is available.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xxxi

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preface

Obtaining Technical Assistance

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

xxxii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

Cisco WAN Manager Overview

Cisco WAN Manager (CWM), a suite of WAN multiservice management applications, provides powerful

fault, configuration, and performance management functionality for WAN multiservice switches. CWM

also provides robust statistics collection, storing the information in an Informix SQL database and

allowing simple integration of this data into existing network management and operations systems.

Element and network management functions are provided by the CWM system, which can manage Cisco

BPX® 8600 and Cisco IGX™ 8400 series wide-area switches, the Cisco BPX SES PNNI Controller, and

Cisco MGX™ 8220, Cisco MGX™ 8230, Cisco MGX™ 8250, and both Release 1 and Release 2 Cisco

MGX™ 8850 devices seamlessly. CWM provides open interfaces for higher level service management

systems.

The CWM desktop graphical user interface (GUI) provides the following applications that are found

under the Apps pull down menu of the CWM Topology Main Window:

•

Connection Manager

Network Browser

Service Class Template Manager

Statistics Collection Manager

Security Manager

Summary Report

Wingz Report

Cisco View

CWM provides these functions in an open management environment. CWM runs on Release 2.7 of

Solaris and integrates with Release 6.10 of HP OpenView.

CWM Release 10 Applications

Connection Manager

The Connection Manager provides the network manager the ability to add, modify, and delete end-to-end

connections. The Connection Manager provides a series of forms-based screens to add, modify, or delete

connections. You select the desired connection end-points and configure the connection type and class

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

1 -1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Cisco WAN Manager Overview

CWM Release 10 Applications

of service. The end-to-end connection is automatically established without requiring configuration of the

network on a switch-by-switch basis. In addition, each connection’s status can be viewed from one

endpoint to the other.

Connection management is one of the most challenging issues in ATM network management. ATM

networks support so many connections that it can become impossible to administer and manage them.

The Connection Service MIB provides integrated automated provisioning of connections based on

quality of service parameters, such as the type of connection being made, available bandwidth, and the

current state of the network.

The Connection Service MIB provides a standard SNMP interface for the WAN ATM network at the

service level. Service providers who are responsible for managing the entire shared network can use this

interface to integrate with automated Operations Support Systems (OSS) provisioning systems, and also

to provide Customer Network Management (CNM) views and control capabilities on a per-connection

basis.

Network Browser

The Network Browser application provides a hierarchical representation of network information in a

table format. Each network element managed by Cisco WAN Manager (CWM) has its own attributes and

fits in the network’s physical or logical hierarchy. In Release 10 of CWM, the Network Browser presents

the network elements that are discovered, managed, and controlled in a hierarchical view for all networks

populated in the network table by CWM processes.

The Network Browser displays the network elements in a hierarchical format based on either a physical

or logical relationship among the various network elements. Networks are displayed at the root level of

the component tree, and nodes and trunks are displayed beneath the networks in a parent/child

relationship.

The Network Browser also displays informational messages in a multi-line text display. Other types of

messages can be displayed in response to user actions.

Service Class Template Manager

The Service Class Template (SCT) application is a new Java-based application for Release 10 of CWM

that allows for creating SCT files which can then be loaded to nodes, and can be associated with

interfaces on cards within these nodes. This application is launched from the CWM desktop and allows

users and network operators to configure AXSM, AXSM-E, and RPM cards, using the Service Class

Template feature. Specifically, users or network operators are able to use the SCT application to create,

modify, delete, load, and associate SCT files to AXSM cards and ports.

Statistics Collection Manager

The Statistics Collection Manager (SCM) for Release 10 of CWM is a new stand alone collector that

allows a separate SCM collection server in both installation and statistics collection. This new feature

allows you to control and manage statistics collection through a stand alone application. The Statistics

Controller Server, Statistics Collection Server, and Statistics Parser Server provide statistics applicable

to the different cards and nodes.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

1 -2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Cisco WAN Manager Overview

CWM Release 10 Applications

The Statistics Collection Manager (SCM) provides a forms-based interface to establish and modify

statistic collection policies for the network. You can configure statistic collection policies such as which

statistics to collect, and collection interval periods for a node, port, or private virtual circuit (PVC). SCM

provides extensive error handling and logging capabilities that enable reliable collection of statistics for

performance or billing applications.

Security Manager

The Security Manager (SM) application is a new Java-based application for Release 10 of CWM that

provides controlled access to multiple users of CWM based on the unique user ID and password. You

can use Security Management to provide individuals access privileges to perform specific tasks such as

viewing topology or establishing and managing connections. Without the required access privileges,

unauthorized users cannot perform any network management functions.

Wingz Report and Summary Report

CWM Statistics Reports are generated through a graphical reporting package based on the Informix

Wingz Report application. CWM also provides node utilization reports not based on Wingz. These

reports are obtained through the Summary Report application. Both the Wingz Report and the

Summary Report applications provide a point-and-click graphical user interface to generate reports

based on information collected by the Statistics Agents. For each report, the user identifies certain

criteria, such as network object, type of statistics, granularity, report interval, and graphical format,

depending on the Report application selected. For the Wingz Report, the report agent queries the

Informix database and generates a report in the desired format, such as line, bar, 3D, or tabular chart.

Scalability of statistic collection is an important differentiator of CWM.

Cisco View

WAN Cisco View is a JAVA-based device management software GUI application that allows you to:

•

Display a graphical representation of the network device

Display configuration and performance information

Perform minor configuration tasks

Perform minor troubleshooting tasks

WAN Cisco View supports card, line, and port configuration on the MGX 8220, 8230, 8250, Release 1

and 2 of the MGX 8850, IGX 8400 series, BPX 8600 series, and BPX SES PNNI Controller.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

1 -3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Cisco WAN Manager Overview

Additional CWM Release 10 Applications and Features

Configuration Save and Restore

The ConfigSave and Restore feature can be found under the Tools pull down menu of the CWM

Topology Main Window. This feature enables you to save a snapshot of the entire network’s

configuration on CWM. In a disaster recovery scenario, you can selectively restore a single node’s

configuration, or restore the configuration of the entire network on a node by node basis. This feature

significantly reduces time to recover in the unlikely event of a catastrophic failure. You can also use the

Save and Restore feature to restore a previous configuration after making a series of incorrect or

temporary changes.

Network Configurator

The Network Configurator is a new Java-based application for Release 10 of CWM that enables users to

add new nodes, or modify or delete existing nodes. It is also used to provide descriptor information, node

name, and IP address information for the nodes in your network. The Network Configurator is started

by entering runConfigurator <machine name> <login> <password> on a shell’s command line,

where Cisco WAN Manager Release 10 is installed. The Network Configurator main window appears,

allowing the user to add, delete, and modify nodes.

CWM to CWM Communications

Release 10 of Cisco WAN Manager has been designed to enable multiple CWM workstations to manage

a network with improved network synchronization and scalability. Due to the size and growth of

networks, it is faster to retrieve initial network information from another CWM workstation that is

already running and synchronized with the network.

A new CWM feature now enables users to continue the provisioning of network data, even when

communications between a Primary CWM and Secondary CWM have been interrupted. If for any reason

the communications between CWM servers are interrupted, user data provisioning will be suspended on

the Secondary CWM, but user data provisioning will continue on the Primary CWM. During that time,

the provisioning of user data and monitoring of the network are not impacted. This is called the Degraded

Mode of Operation, and is discussed in Chapter 11, CWM-CWM Communications.

Release 10 of CWM uses an industry standard CORBA architecture to implement the communications

between two or more CWM workstations. The architecture uses a server-client structure for

communications between the CWM server and client processes.

Access to IGX, BPX, and MGX Networks

IGX, BPX, and MGX switches provide an Ethernet 802.3 AUI LAN interface to CWM for network

management control and information. An entire network can be managed through an Ethernet

connection on a single WAN switch or through multiple Ethernet interfaces distributed throughout the

network. Cisco WAN switches use TCP/IP over Ethernet to communicate between CWM network

management workstations and the WAN switch. Telnet support is also available to enable LAN-based

workstations access to the IGX, BPX, or MGX management interface.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

1 -4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Cisco WAN Manager Overview

Additional CWM Release 10 Applications and Features

Graceful Software and Firmware Download and Upgrades

Software and Firmware downloading of all operating system and firmware code is fully supported by

BPX, IGX, MGX, and CWM. Software and firmware upgrades are performed by loading new code from

either a CWM workstation via TCP/IP, a new NPM module, or via dial in from Cisco’s Technical

Assistance Center (TAC). New software and firmware are downloaded throughout the network utilizing

inter-nodal trunks. New code is loaded into the standby NPM card for initiation at a specified time. This

new code can be uploaded to all other IGXs in-band through the ATM fabric connecting the switches.

Firmware upgrades for a specific function module are performed by first loading the new firmware code

into the NPM. Then a command is issued to burn the function module with the new firmware revision.

This may take up to ten minutes, during which time the function module is out of service. Software

upgrades are conducted in background, and then activated network wide. The duration of a software

activation is 10 seconds per node on a rolling basis. Configuration translation software is provided with

software upgrades to automatically migrate existing configuration information into new software

releases.

Simultaneous upgrades to multiple devices is supported via background loading of new code and

simultaneous switching to the new code.

During all software and firmware upgrades the current configuration is retained. The conversion is

automatic and performed by the new software release. If a software upgrade is faulty a single command

can return the entire network to the previous version software and configuration in ten seconds.

Performance Management

The CWM TFTP statistics collection facility offers extensive usage and error collection. A wide range

of statistics are available at the port and virtual channel level to support operations and maintenance,

customer network management and usage-based billing. Historical statistical information is stored in the

CWM Informix database. The open SQL interface architecture then provides users with direct access to

the information stored in the Informix relational database. CWM addresses historical information via the

SQL architecture because of the large volume of information present in the database and the

inefficiencies involved in retrieving it via SNMP.

•

Connection Statistics

Circuit Line Statistics

Packet Line Statistics

Frame Relay Port Statistics

ATM Statistics

Physical Layer Statistics

ATM Layer Statistics

Open Management

CWM provides seamless element and network management for the complete Cisco WAN multiservice

switching product portfolio, including BPX, MGX, and IGX. The distributed intelligent architecture

enables each network element to collect comprehensive performance and utilization statistics. Each node

stores these statistics in a file which is then transferred to CWM, where it is stored in the SQL database.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

1 -5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Cisco WAN Manager Overview

Additional CWM Release 10 Applications and Features

Operating within the HP OpenView multi-vendor management environments, CWM supports a suite of

open interfaces for access to management information including:

•

Standard management integration protocols interfaces, including SNMP

SQL access to the Informix relational traffic database

X-terminal access for multiple operators into CWM management agents

Craft interface for terminals and simple tools

WAN multiservice management can be integrated within the multi-vendor environment using third party

applications in conjunction with the CWM application. Otherwise, integration management interfaces

and software tools can achieve fault, configuration, performance and security management through the

open management interfaces.

Event Manager

Network faults are integrated with the HP OpenView Event Browser to enable management of

heterogeneous, multi-vendor network environments. Through the Event Browser the events can be

filtered by a combination of event type, source, message string, time received, and severity, grouped into

categories based on event severity, or acted-on through custom-defined operator actions. Different

actions can be configured on a per-node basis such that the same type of event from different sources

cause different automatic actions.

Network Topology

The Cisco WAN network topology is automatically discovered and presented through topology map

windows. Network element and trunk status are represented by icon color changes dynamically. Custom

background images can be associated with each network map to provide a user-defined view of the

network.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

1 -6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

Starting and Stopping Cisco WAN Manager

This chapter provides information about starting and stopping Cisco WAN Manager (CWM), using the

CWM main menu, CWM in restricted access mode, and starting HP OpenView.

Starting Cisco WAN Manager

This section provides information about starting CWM. This section includes the following procedures:

•

Starting CWM from a workstation for the first time

Performing a warm start of CWM

Performing a cold start of CWM

Note

These procedures describe CWM startup from a workstation running the Sun Solaris operating system.

Starting CWM for the First Time

This section describes how to start CWM for the first time. This procedure is also used to start CWM

from a workstation that has been powered off.

Step 1

Step 2

Turn on power to any peripheral devices, such as external disk drives, tape drives, or monitors, then turn

power on to the workstation.

Observe the messages that are displayed on the workstation as it boots up, and wait for the login prompt.

While the Solaris OS is booting, the HPOV SNMP Agent, the HPOV background processes, and the

Informix database are also started.

At the Solaris login window, click on Options > Session > CDE.

Note

This step is necessary only on the first login. If asked during the login process, select CDE again.

Step 3

Step 4

Left click the TTT icon to launch the Style Manager and perform the following steps to save system

resources:

a. Click on Screen, Screen Saver, and Screen Lock Off.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

2 -1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Starting and Stopping Cisco WAN Manager

Starting Cisco WAN Manager

b. Click on Backdrop, select GrayDk, then click Apply.

Step 5

Step 6

Use the CDE Menu Bar to change to screens Two, Three, and Four, and select the same options for those

screens. Return to screen One and close Style Manager when completed.

Right click on the desktop and select Programs > Terminal.

Move this window to the upper-right corner of the screen.

Right click on the desktop and select Programs > Console.

Step 7

Reduce the height of this window so it displays at least five lines (to enable you to monitor system

messages). Move the window so that it rests on the CDE Menu Bar and all icons are visible.

Note

Do not use the Console window for any purpose other than monitoring system messages.

Step 8

Left click the TTT icon to launch the Style Manager, then select Startup, Set Home Session..., and click

OK.

This saves your startup login preferences.

Note

In a CDE environment, if a Home Session has not been set, any previously opened applications

will run. If the console and terminal windows do not open under CDE, right click the mouse on

an empty portion of the background and select Programs > Console, then select Programs >

Terminal.

Step 9

In the terminal window, enter CWM to display the CWM main menu.

Note

If the error message “Environment Variable DISPLAY not set” is displayed when you attempt to

start the main menu and the display is not being xhosted to another workstation, enter the

following: setenv DISPLAY machine_name:0.0

Step 10 Enter 1 to select the Start Core option and press Return.

Observe the messages that are displayed. Notice the gateway and stand alone nodes socketed messages

to the IP-LAN addresses.

A Link0 down message may be displayed, followed by a Link0 up for each gateway node (if

communication is established to the gateway node), then a group of Link1 up messages for all nodes, if

everything is working correctly.

There will probably be several ILOG RT-Broker messages; disregard these messages and the EMSD

dumping message, if it is displayed. This is normal operation. Also disregard any server EMDAEMON

not registered messages.

Note

Additional messages will be displayed for PNNI nodes.

After you see the Link 0, Link 1, and gateway node messages indicating the connections are up, continue

to the next step. (If there is a problem with a Link connection, you will not see all connections come up.

Note

Stand alone MGX 8850 switches do not use Link protocol and will not show up in these

messages. Feeder MGX 8850 switches act like MGX 8220 switches and do not display Link 1

messages.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

2 -2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Starting and Stopping Cisco WAN Manager

Starting Cisco WAN Manager

Step 11 Press Return to redisplay the main menu.

At this point, you can issue other main menu options to start the CWM desktop or the Statistics Manager.

Step 12 Enter 3 to launch the CWM Desktop.

Step 13 From the CWM Desktop, left click on the Statistic Collection Manager icon to launch the Statistics

Manager application.

Minimize the Statistic Collection Manager window.

Step 14 Right click on the desktop and select Programs > Terminal to open another xterm window.

Step 15 In the new xterm window, enter ovw & to start the Openview application which opens the Openview

graphical user interface (GUI) and the Event Manager.

The IP map contains HPOV’s view of the attached IP network and the CWM map contains the CWM

nodes which are displayed directly from CWM via the SvOvTopology daemon. Use the buttons in the

Event Manager window to view desired event categories.

Performing a Warm Start of CWM

A warm start of CWM consists of stopping the application, then restarting it. A warm start of CWM can

aid in overcoming some database inconsistencies, and more importantly, no data is lost. When you

perform a warm start of CWM, the application continues to use data in the existing Informix

database.

To perform a warm start of CWM, complete the following steps:

Step 1

From the CWM main menu, enter 2 to select the Stop Core option, then confirm that you want to stop

core by responding y to the prompt.

It should take less than a minute for all of the processes and messages to end.

Press Return to redisplay the CWM main menu.

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

From the main menu, enter 1 to select the Start Core option.

When the CWM main menu is displayed, enter 3 to launch the CWM Desktop.

Performing a Cold Start of CWM

You perform a cold start of CWM when you start the application with an empty database. A cold start is

typically used following a CWM upgrade or if there were too many database inconsistencies within the

network for a warm start recovery to be successful. You use the create_db command to build a new,

empty database. The command create_db destroys any existing data in the database including

statistics and object comments.

Cold start options include the following:

•

coldstart -F

coldstart

coldstartSCM

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

2 -3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Starting and Stopping Cisco WAN Manager

Stopping Cisco WAN Manager

•

coldstartSCM -F

To perform a cold start of CWM, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

At the CWM workstation, enter CWM to display the main menu.

From the CWM main menu, enter 2 to select the Stop Core option, then confirm that you want to stop

core by responding y to the prompt.

It might take several minutes for all of the processes and messages to end, depending upon the number

of nodes in the network.

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Press Return to redisplay the CWM main menu.

From the main menu, enter x to exit the CWM application.

Enter create_db.

Dozens of messages will be displayed, starting with the message dropping db. Additional messages will

indicate that tables are being created and procedures stored. The shell prompt will return in less than a

minute.

Step 6

Step 7

Step 8

At the CWM workstation, enter CWM to redisplay the main menu.

From the main menu, enter 1 to select the Start Core option.

When the CWM main menu is displayed, enter 3 to launch the CWM Desktop.

Stopping Cisco WAN Manager

This section provides information about stopping CWM. This section includes the following procedures:

Stopping the CWM application

Stopping the CWM application and powering off the workstation

•

Stopping CWM

To stop the CWM application, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Close the HP Openview application (if it is running) by selecting Map > Exit from any Openview

window and click OK when prompted to confirm the operation.

Step 2

Step 3

Close the CWM Desktop by selecting File > Exit from the Desktop main window.

If the Statistics Manager is running, select File > Quit and click OK when prompted to confirm the

operation.

Step 4

Step 5

Close any other CWM applications, such as Connection Manager, that might be currently running.

From the CWM main menu, enter 2 to select the Stop Core option, then confirm that you want to stop

core by responding y to the prompt.

It might take several minutes for all of the processes and messages to end, depending upon the number

of nodes in the network.

Step 6

Press Return to redisplay the CWM main menu.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

2 -4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Starting and Stopping Cisco WAN Manager

CWM Main Menu

Step 7

From the main menu, enter x to exit the CWM application.

Stopping CWM and Powering Off the CWM Workstation

This section describes the proper method of stopping the CWM application to power down the

workstation.

Step 1

In the CWM terminal window, switch to user root, and enter the following to halt the workstation:

# sync; sync; halt

Instead of the halt command, you can use the shutdown command to broadcast a shutdown message to

all logged-in users. Enter one of the following:

•

# sync; sync; shutdown -i 0 -g 0 (firmware)

# sync; sync; shutdown -i 5 -g 0 (power off)

# sync; sync; shutdown -i 6 -g 0 (reboot)

Note

If you issue a shutdown command, the following step is unnecessary.

Step 2

At the OK prompt, enter the following to power down the workstation:

OK power-off

CWM Main Menu

Upon launching CWM, the Main Menu is displayed, enabling you to initiate and terminate the CWM

core processes and to access the CWM Desktop window. You can also use the main menu to get the name

of the current database.

To launch Cisco WAN Manager and display the main menu, open a C-shell window on the workstation

where CWM has been installed, and complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Start CWM:

host% CWM

The CWM Main Menu is displayed as shown in Figure 2-1. To select any of the menu options, specify

the number and press Return.

Step 3

From the CWM Main Menu, start the CWM Core process. Specify 1 at the prompt then press Return

to initiate the Start Core option.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

2 -5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Starting and Stopping Cisco WAN Manager

Restricted Access Users

Figure 2-1 CWM Main Menu

Table 2-1 lists the CWM main menu options

Table 2-1 CWM Main Menu Options

Menu Option

Descriptions

Start Core

Starts the CWM core and initiates CWM daemon

processes

Stop Core

Stops the CWM daemon processes

Displays the CWM desktop window

Start Desktop

Dump db data

This option is no longer supported. For

information on saving the data in the Informix

database, refer tothe Cisco WAN Manager

Database Interface Guide, Release 10.

Current db name

Exit

Displays the name of the database currently

loaded in CWM

Exits CWM without shutting down the CWM core

processes

Restricted Access Users

For Release 10 of Cisco WAN Manager , a new CWM desktop application, CWM Administration,

manages user security. CWM Administration allows restricted access logins to enable users to perform

tasks based on detailed access privileges. The user svplus still exists and should be used by experienced

and trusted system administrators.

Note

In earlier releases of Cisco StrataView Plus (release 9.1 and below), the svplus-r account was created

when the application was installed on the workstation. The svplus-r account has been removed from

CWM starting with release 9.2.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

2 -6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Starting and Stopping Cisco WAN Manager

Starting HP OpenView

CWM Administration provides controlled access through the user’s Unix userID and password by

customizing user-access profiles. The user access profiles comprise a list of Access Privileges for users

for a specific function including:

•

ConMgr

NW Topology

Image Download

Node Resync

For each action, a user may be given privileges to read, create, modify or delete functions, or a user may

have all privileges to manage all or some actions.

Note

As in previous releases, only user svplus can start and stop the CWM core processes.

Starting HP OpenView

This section describes how to start the HP OpenView application. To start the HP OpenView application,

complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

From one of the C-shell windows, launch CWM and start the core processes.

In the second window, invoke the HP OpenView application by entering the following at a command line

prompt:

# ovw &

Step 3

Step 4

Several windows are displayed including warnings, Event Categories, and status updates. Eventually the

Root window is displayed.

Double-click on the CWM Network icon to display the CWM Network Topology window.

From the pull-down menus, you can launch all of the CWM features. Many menu items are disabled until

an appropriate element is selected, such as a node in the topology.

The CWM Desktop Window

The CWM Desktop window (Figure 2-2) provides icon buttons that correspond to the principal CWM

applications. You click on a particular icon to launch the corresponding application you need for network

management, monitoring, report generation, and administration tasks. All the CWM applications are

described in subsequent chapters in this book.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

2 -7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Starting and Stopping Cisco WAN Manager

The CWM Desktop Window

Figure 2-2 CWM Desktop Window

CWM Desktop Applications

The following section describes the CWM Desktop applications.

Connection Manager

Select this application to create end-to-end connections or Permanent Virtual circuits (PVCs). The

Connection Manager application is described in detail in Chapter 4, “Connection Manager”.

Network Browser

Select this application to view a hierarchical representation of network information in a table format.

The Network Browser application is described in detail in Chapter 5, “Network Browser”.

Service Class Template Manager

Select this application to create SCT files which can then be loaded to nodes, and can be associated

with interfaces on cards within these nodes. The Service Class Template application is described in

detail in Chapter 7, “Service Class Template Manager”.

Statistic Collection Manager

Select this application to control and manage statistics collection. The Statistic Collection Manager

application is described in detail in Chapter 8, “Statistic Collection Manager”.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

2 -8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Starting and Stopping Cisco WAN Manager

Starting Additional CWM GUIs

Security Manager

Select this application to provide individuals access privileges to perform specific tasks such as

viewing topology or establishing and managing connections. The Security Manager application is

described in detail in Chapter 6, “Security Manager”.

Summary Report

Select this application to view the Summary Report application window which provides basic

performance reports including historical statistics on connection traffic, connection traffic dropped,

trunk traffic, and network resource capacity.

Wingz Report

Select this application to open the Wingz spreadsheet to view statistics retrieved from the Informix

database.

Cisco View

Select this application in order to:

•

Display a graphical representation of the network device

Display configuration and performance information

Perform minor configuration tasks

Perform minor troubleshooting tasks

WAN Cisco View supports card, line, and port configuration on the MGX 8220, 8230, 8250, Release 1

and 2 of the MGX 8850, IGX 8400 series, BPX 8600 series, and BPX SES PNNI Controller.

Network Configurator

Select this application to add new nodes, or modify or delete existing nodes on your network. The

Network Configurator application is described in detail in Chapter 10, “Network Configurator”.

Starting Additional CWM GUIs

Note

To run multiple Cisco WAN Manager GUIs, you must have a multi-user Wingz license.

More than one workstation can run the CWM GUI simultaneously. To run an additional CWM GUI,

complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Log into a workstation other than the one running the CWM core processes.

Enter the following command:

xhost +

This is not necessary if both workstations have the other in its /etc/xhost file as a “+.”

Do a remote login to the CWM workstation.

rlogin -l login_id hostname

Step 3

Note

You can also use the telnet command to connect to the remote host.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

2 -9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Starting and Stopping Cisco WAN Manager

Starting Additional CWM GUIs

Step 4

Set the DISPLAY environmental variable by entering the following:

setenv DISPLAY ip_address:0.0

where ip_address is the IP address of the workstation from which you have issued the telnet command.

Launch CWM by entering CWM, then select Start Desktop from the main menu.

Step 5

Note

CWM core processes running on a workstation can be stopped from any other workstation that is running

a remote CWM session. For example, when you log into a workstation running the CWM core processes

and select Stop Core (Option 2), you are terminating the CWM core processes for not only yourself, but

for all others using those CWM core processes. Therefore, you must be careful not to select the Stop

Core option when you are through. Take care to close only the windows you have opened remotely, and

at the CWM main menu, select X to exit the application.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

2 -1 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

Network Topology

The CWM Network Topology application is a Java-based application that is launched from the CWM

desktop. The CWM topology subsystem has been updated in Release 10 of CWM to provide better

modularity and greater scalability. New processes within the topology server handle different types of

network discovery, and individual clients have a direct connection to the topology server for their

respective topologies.

Release 10 of CWM has the additional benefit of easy access features that have been streamlined into

the Network Topology, resulting in a more accessible and convenient way to navigate, discover and

display the network.

Topology Main Window

Figure 3-1 shows the main window of the Network Topology which contains the following components:

•

Title bar—displays the hostname of the CWM server (also known as the topology gateway) to which

a given instance of network topology is connected.

•

Menu bar—Provides available menu options for the network topology application.

Tool bar—Contains the most frequently used actions in icon format. The tool bar can be modified

to display vertically as well as horizontally, depending on your preference.

•

Hierarchy tree and graph—Contain topology information in list or textual format (hierarchy tree) or

in a graphical view. The hierarchy tree displays much more information that the graphical view.

However, the graphical view more readily displays relationships, locations, and status of

components.

•

Tabs—Provide different views of the topology information based upon criteria such as discovery

protocol. Each tab holds hierarchy tree and graph views. The vertical panel that separates these

views can be moved to resize either the hierarchy tree or the graph view.

Status bar—Displays any errors or informational messages as you attempt to perform various

actions.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Topology Main Window

Figure 3-1 Netw ork Topology Display

Title Bar

Displays the hostname of the CWM server.

Menu Bar

The network topology menu bar allows you to make a selection by pulling down a menu and clicking on

a desired action. The following are available:

•

File

Edit

View

Actions

Apps

Tools

Audible Alarm

Help

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Topology Main Window

Left click on the menu to view the available options. Scroll to the selected option and release the mouse

button to select a menu item. Additionally, keyboard shortcuts (accelerators) and mnemonics are also

provided to directly launch a menu selection.

The available menu options are discussed in detail later in this chapter.

Tool Bar

The network topology toolbar replaces the desktop of previous releases of CWM and Cisco StrataView

Plus. The network topology toolbar provides icons that enable you to launch the more frequently used

functions of CWM. The following CWM applications, (discussed in detail later in this chapter), can be

launched by clicking on the appropriate icon:

•

Connection Manager

Network Browser

Service Class Template Manager

Statistics Collection Manager

Security Manager

Summary Reports

Wingz Reports

Cisco View

The following functions are also available on the network topology tool bar:

•

Save

Select

Zoom

The network topology tool bar is a dockable tool bar. You can separate the toolbar from the network

topology main window or position it vertically instead of horizontally. To separate the tool bar, left click

the mouse in the tool bar position handler and drag the tool bar to the desktop location you prefer.

Hierarchy Tree and Graph

The Hierarchy tree and graph panels provide topology information in a list or textual format (hierarchy

tree) or in a graphical view. The hierarchy tree displays much more information than the graphical view.

However, the graphical view more readily displays relationships, locations, and status of components.

Network Topology Views

Tabs at the bottom of the Network Topology Main Window provide different views of the topology

information based upon the type of view desired. Each tab holds hierarchy tree and graph views. The

vertical panel that separates these views can be moved to resize either the hierarchy tree or the graph

view. The three tabs are:

•

Integrated_View

Auto_Route_View

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Network Topology Menus

•

Standalone_View

Status Bar

Displays any errors or informational messages as you attempt to perform various actions

Using the Network Topology Menus

This section describes the functions provided via the network topology menus.

File Menu

The File menu, shown in Figure 3-2, the provides network topology application level operations.

Note

The sequence to open the file menu is to press the Alt and F keys simultaneously.

Figure 3-2 File Menu Options

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Network Topology Menus

Save

The Save option saves the current positions of the nodes, trunks, and group information in all of the

views.

Mnemonic

Alt + S

Accelerator

Ctrl + S

Exit

The Print option prints the current view of the topology main window.

Mnemonic

Alt + P

Accelerator

Ctrl + P

The Exit option exits the network topology application and closes the main window.

Mnemonic

Alt + X

Accelerator

None available

Note

Closing the network topology application also removes your tool bar access to other CWM applications,

unless you have detached the tool bar from the network topology GUI.

Edit Menu

The Edit menu, shown in Figure 3-3, provides editing access to network topology information using a

Group submenu.

Note

The mnemonic to open the file menu is to press the Alt and E keys simultaneously. There are no other

mnemonics or shortcuts available for the edit menu options.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Network Topology Menus

Figure 3-3 Edit Menu

Group

The Group submenu provides editing of network topology information through the following options:

Add Node

Selecting the Add Node option displays a dialog box into which you provide the required information

for a node to be added to the network.

Delete Node

Delete

Selecting the Delete Node option displays a dialog box into which you provide the required information

to delete a node from the network.

Selecting the Delete option displays a dialog box into which you provide the required information to

delete a group of nodes from the network.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Network Topology Menus

View Menu

The View menu provides the following options which directly change the current view of network

topology:

•

Layer

Zoom

Background

Overview Window

Options

Note

The mnemonic to open the view menu is to press the Alt and V keys simultaneously.

Layer

The Layer option, shown in Figure 3-4, is a submenu which allows the user to display the IP address,

or turn off the display of the IP address, as well as displaying the Node Name off or on.

Figure 3-4 View Menu- Layer Subm enu

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Network Topology Menus

Zoom

The Zoom option, shown in Figure 3-5, is a submenu which provides different levels of zoom functions.

The Zoom option zooms the current submap, or window, by the percentage you choose:

Zoom (Percentage)

•

25%

50%

100% (actual size)

200%

400%

Fit in Window

The Fit in Window option fits all objects in the current submap into the available space on the submap.

Mnemonic

None

Accelerator

Ctrl + F

Custom Zoom

The Custom Zoom option displays a dialog box allowing you to provide a specific percentage to zoom

the current submap.

Mnemonic

None

Accelerator

Ctrl + M

Zoom In / Zoom Out

The Zoom In/ Zoom Out option zooms in or zooms out of the current submap image.

Zoom In

Zoom Out

Accelerator

NumPad +

NumPad -

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Network Topology Menus

Figure 3-5 View Menu- Zoom Subm enu

Background

The Background option, shown in Figure 3-6, is a submenu which provides the following functions:

Set Color

The Set Color option sets the background color of the current submap, or clears the background color

of the current submap.

Set Map

The Set Map option brings up a directory window that allows you to save a Topology background map

by choosing from a variety of ILV images.

Note

CWM currently ships with a base set of ILV images. Use these ILV images (background maps) to avoid

resolution problems that can occur with images in other formats such as .gif or .jpg. Additional images

may be used by copying a new image to the image directory.

Clear Map

The Clear Map option clears the background image in the current submap.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Network Topology Menus

Figure 3-6 View Menu- Background Subm enu

Overview Window

The network topology Overview Window option provides a complete view of the topology map.

Options

Options is a submenu which provides a window with Navigation and Background Image panels.

Selecting the Navigation panel allows you to choose between:

•

Open each submap in the same window

Open each submap in its own window

Selecting the Background Image panel allows you to Display Style using the following options:

•

Hide Image

Center Image

Tile Image

Stretch Image

The Background Image panel also allows you to set magnification through the Image Scale.

Note

The contents of the Background Image panel will be enabled if a background image has been selected.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -1 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Network Topology Menus

Actions Menu

The Actions menu, shown in Figure 3-7, provides the following options which directly change the

current view of network topology:

•

Network

Node

Trunk

Group

Note

The mnemonic to open the action menu is to press the Alt and A keys simultaneously.

Network

The Network submenu option enables the display of the following views:

Display Link Status

The Display Link Status option displays the link status of all nodes in the current submap.

Note

This option is only applicable to auto route (AR) networks.

VSI Consistency Check

The VSI Consistency Check option brings up a Display VSI Resource Check dialog box which lists

errors and VSI trunk end partition information.

Note

This option is only applicable to auto route (AR) networks.

Expand Network InView

To see an expanded view of the network, first highlight the network you would like to view by placing

the curser on the network in the CWM Topology window, and then select the Expand Network InView

option from the Network submenu. You will then see an expanded view of the network in the CWM

Topology window.

Expand Network InSubmap

To see an expanded view of the network in a submap, first highlight the network you would like to view

by placing the curser on the network in the CWM Topology window, and then select the Expand

Network InSubmap option from the Network submenu. You will then see an expanded view of the

network in the current submap.

Collapse Network InView

The Collapse Network InView option shows a collapsed view of the selected network in the CWM

Topology window.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Network Topology Menus

Collapse All Network

The Collapse All Network option shows a collapsed view of the entire network in the Topology main

window.

Display Nodes

Display Trunks

The Display Nodes option displays all nodes.

The Display Trunks option displays all trunks.

Figure 3-7 Actions Menu- Netw ork Subm enu

Node

The Node submenu option brings up a dialog box for operations specific to a selected node:

The Display Shelf option brings up a dialog box that shows the shelves of a selected node.

Display Shelf

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -1 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Network Topology Menus

Admin

The Admin option displays a telnet session window to connect to the selected node in the current

submap.

Node Resync

VSI Partition

Equipment Viewer

The Node Resync option displays the Node Resync Progress dialog for the selected node in the current

submap.

The VSI Partition option displays the VSI Partition dialog box for the selected node in the current

submap.

To bring up the Equipment Viewer window, first select the node you would like to view from the left

panel of the CWM Topology expanded tree, and then select the Equipment Viewer option from the

Node submenu. The Equipment Viewer window appears, with a Diagnostic pull down menu that has

Running BERT and BERT Test options for viewing diagnostics on the selected node.

Cisco View

The CiscoView option that is accessed from the Actions sub-menu (versus the Apps pull-down menu,

as described in this chapter under the section titled, "Apps Menu"), brings up a CiscoView window that

allows you to select a device for a particular node in which to view Telnet, CCO, Cisco Support,

Preferences, About, and Help information.

XPVC Preferred Cnf

XPVC Preferred Cnf is a tool that allows users to add, modify or delete data to or from the xpvc_Pref

table. If there is no entry, then no provisioning can be done. This xpvc_preferred data is used by

Connection Manager and the Proxy subsystem for the provisioning of XPVCs.

The XPVC Preferred Cnf option brings up the XPVC Table Configurator dialog box with XPVC

Preferred data displayed as Active Entries (contains all of the current Active entries in the

xpvc_preferred table) or Inactive Entries.

Note

When a user selects an Active entry and clicks on the Delete button, and an xpvc connection exists which

was provisioned using this entry, it will be marked as "Inactive" and displayed as "Inactive Entries".

Nodes are listed by Node Name, with Primary Link and Secondary Link information presented in

neighboring rows. The Is Preferred column shows whether a XPVC connection is or is not preferred.

Refresh Display, Add Entry, Modify Entry, and Delete Entry options are found at the bottom of the

XPVC Preferred Cnf dialog box and are used against the xpvc_preferred table. The protocol type is

automatically assigned as XPVC, provided that all user endpoints that are selected in the AR network

have a xpvc_preferred table entry with the preferred flag set.

Note

CWM will attempt XPVC provisioning on the node or its feeders, provided that all user endpoints that

are selected in the AR network have an Active xpvc_preferred table entry with the preferred flag set.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Network Topology Menus

Select Node from the Actions dropdown menu found on the Topology main menu bar, and then select

the XPVC Preferred Cnf option as shown in Figure 3-8.

Figure 3-8 Actions Menu- Node Subm enu

Figure 3-9 shows the XPVC preferred Table Configurator dialog box that appears after selecting the

XPVC Preferred Cnf option found under the Actions pull-down menu.

Figure 3-9 XPVC Preferred Table Configurator

Figure 3-10 shows the XPVC Edit Entry dialog box that appears after pressing the Modify entry button

from the XPVC preferred Table Configurator dialog box.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -1 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Network Topology Menus

Figure 3-10 XPVC Edit Entry

Figure 3-11 shows the XPVC Edit Entry dialog box with network nodes for Network1that appear after

selecting Network1 from the Edge Network pull-down menu.

Figure 3-11 XPVC Edit Entry Network

Trunk

The Trunk option provides information about an individual trunk.

Display Trunk

The Display Trunk option displays a trunk information dialog for the selected trunk in the current

submap.

Group

The Group option provides information about nodes and trunks.

Display Nodes

The Display Nodes option brings up a nodes information dialog for the selected group in the current

submap.

Display Trunks

The Display Trunks option brings up a trunks information dialog for the selected group in the current

submap.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Network Topology Menus

Apps Menu

The Apps menu, shown in Figure 3-12, provides applications that are launched from the main window

of network topology, but are external to the network topology application.

Figure 3-12 Apps Menu

Connection Manager

The Connection Manager option launches the Connection Manager (CM) application. The CM

provides the network manager the ability to add, modify, and delete end-to-end connections.

Network Browser

The Network Browser option launches the Network Browser application. The Network Browser

displays network elements based on either a physical or logical relationship among the various network

elements.

Service Class Template Manager

The Service Class Template Manager option launches the Service Class Template Manager (SCT)

application. The SCT allows for creating SCT files which can be loaded to nodes, and associated with

interfaces on cards within these nodes.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -1 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Network Topology Menus

Statistics Collection Manager

The Statistic Collection Manager option launches the Statistic Collection Manager (SCM) application.

The SCM provides a forms-based interface to establish and modify statistic collection policies for the

network.

Security Manager

Summary Report

Wingz Report

The Security Manager option launches the Security Manager application. The Security Manager

provides controlled access to multiple users of CWM based on the unique user ID and password.

The Summary Report option launches the Summary Report application. CWM provides node

utilization reports not based on Wingz through the Summary Report application.

The Wingz Report option launches the Wingz Report application. CWM Statistics Reports are

generated through a graphical reporting package based on the Informix Wingz Report application.

Cisco View

The CiscoView option brings up a CiscoView window that allows you to select a device in which to view

Telnet, CCO, Cisco Support, Preferences, About, and Help information.

WAN CiscoView is a JAVA-based device management software GUI application that allows you to:

•

Display a graphical representation of the network device

Display configuration and performance information

Perform minor configuration tasks

Perform minor troubleshooting tasks

WAN CiscoView supports card, line, and port configuration on the MGX 8220, 8230, 8250, Release 1

and 2 of the MGX 8850, IGX 8400 series, BPX 8600 series, and BPX SES PNNI Controller.

Please see your CiscoView documentation for more details about this feature.

Tools Menu

The Tools menu provides operations or applications that are launched from the main window of the

Network Topology, but are external to the Network Topology application.

Config Save and Restore

The Config Save and Restore option launches an application with In-Progress, Config Save, and Config

Restore tabbed windows which allow you to view and change criteria for the selected node in the current

submap.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Network Topology Menus

SW/FW Images

The SW/FW (software/firmware) Images option launches the Image Download application for the

selected node in the current submap.

Audible Alarm Menu

Configuration

Displays an Audible Alarm Configuration window with an editable Beep Time Interval in milliseconds,

and Enable and Continuous option settings.

Acknowledge

Acknowledges Audible Alarm setting.

Help Menu

The Help menu, as shown in Figure 3-13, provides submenus with About and Help information which

are described below.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -1 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Network Topology Menus

Figure 3-13 Help Menu

About

Information about this version of the CWM Network Topology GUI.

Help On Icons/Trunks

Information about how to interpret the icons displayed in the topology graph window. These Help

windows are shown in Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-15.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Network Topology Menus

Figure 3-14 Help On Icons/ Trunks

Help On Color

Information about how to interpret the color of the icons displayed in the topology graph window.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -2 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Right Click Options

Figure 3-15 Help On Color

Right Click Options

Submap and submenus provide an easy way to change the view of the Network Topology.There are two

ways to access submaps and submenus on the Network Topology. Either right click on a node in the

topology window to display the following pull down menu options:

The Navigation submenu provides Inplace Submap, New Submap, and Overlay Submap,

The Network submenu provides Display Link Status, VSI Consistency Check, Expand Network in

View, Expand Network in Submap, Collapse Network in View, Collapse all Network, Display

Nodes, and Display Trunks options. These options are also found under the Actions menu, described

earlier in this chapter.

The Group submenu provides Add Node, Delete Node, Delete, Display Nodes, and Display Trunks

options. These options are also found under the Edit menu, described earlier in this chapter.

The Node submenu provides Display Shelf, Admin, Node Resync, VSI Partition, Equipment Viewer,

CiscoView, and XPVC Preferred Cnf options. These options are also found under the Actions menu,

described earlier in this chapter.

To access additional submaps and submenus, right click in the Topology window outside of a node area.

The following pull down menu options are displayed:

The Network submenu provides Display Link Status, VSI Consistency Check, Expand Network in

View, Expand Network in Submap, Collapse Network in View, Collapse all Network, Display

Nodes, and Display Trunks options. These options are also found under the Actions menu, described

earlier in this chapter.

The Navigation submenu provides Show Parent Map and Show Root Map submap options.

The Background submenu provides Set Color, Set Map and Clear Map options. These can also be

found under the View menu described earlier in this chapter. In addition to these options, the

Background menu provides Color, Monochrome, Less Contrast and More Contrast options.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Right Click Options

Navigation Submaps

Inplace Submap

The Inplace Submap option creates an encased submap of the selected node.

New Submap

The New Submap option creates a new submap within the current Topology.

Overlay Submap

The Overlay Submap option overlays the nodes on the current Topology.

Figure 3-16 Navigation Subm aps

Network Submenu

The Network submenu, as shown in Figure 3-17, provides Display Link Status, VSI Consistency

Check, Expand Network in View, Expand Network in Submap, Collapse Network in View,

Collapse all Network, Display Nodes, and Display Trunks options. These options are also found under

the Actions menu, described earlier in this chapter.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -2 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Right Click Options

Figure 3-17 Netw ork Subm enu

Group Submenu

The Group submenu, as shown in Figure 3-18, provides Add Node, Delete Node, Delete, Display

Nodes, and Display Trunks options. These options are also found under the Edit menu, described

earlier in this chapter.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Right Click Options

Figure 3-18 Group Subm enu

Node Submenu

The Node submenu, as shown in Figure 3-19, provides Display Shelf, Admin, Node Resync, VSI

Partition, Equipment Viewer, CiscoView, and XPVC Preferred Cnf options. These options are also

found under the Actions menu, described earlier in this chapter.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -2 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Right Click Options

Figure 3-19 Node Subm enu

Save Button

The save button provides the same function as the Save option of the File menu.

Select Button

The select button enables you to select an object in the current submap, perhaps to drag to a different

location on the map or upon which to perform another action.

Zoom Button

Print Button

This zoom button zooms out the selected objects during a drag operation.

The print button provides the same function as the Print option of the File menu.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Hierarchy Tree

The network topology hierarchy tree provides a list view of all available topology information.

Figure 3-20 Expanded View of Network Topology Hierarchy

Interaction with the Hierarchy Tree

When first displayed, the network topology hierarchy tree displays only the top-level objects. By

clicking on the object, you can expand its view to display any child objects it contains.

Network Alarm Colors

CWM uses color to display alarm situations detected by the Network Topology:

•

Normal (green)

Minor (yellow)

Major (orange)

Critical (red)

Unreachable (gray)

Unknown (blue)

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -2 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Hierarchy Tree

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Network Topology

Using the Hierarchy Tree

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

3 -2 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

Connection Manager

This chapter describes the CWM Connection Manager (CM) desktop application. You use the

Connection Manager to create and maintain end-to-end connections, Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs),

or Soft Permanent Virtual Circuits (SPVCs). A connection consists of a source (localEnd), a destination

(remoteEnd) and a set of connection parameters required for the routing.

Connection Manager Overview

You can have up to four Connection Manager windows per CWM desktop session running on your

workstation at any one time (though only one can be started from the CWM Desktop; the others must be

started from a Connection Manager window’s File menu).

The Security Management feature, in which each CWM user has their own access profile, is used to

determine whether you have the rights to use each option in the CWM Connection Manager. The security

mapping for CWM Connection Manager is:

•

If you have Read Permission you can list connections.

If you have Create Permission, you can add new connections and perform diagnostics. In addition,

you have Read Permission privileges.

•

If you have Modify Permission, you can modify connections. In addition, you have Read Permission

privileges.

If you have Delete Permission, you can delete connections. In addition, you have Read Permission

privileges.

If you have All permissions, you can do all of the above.

Supported Connection Types

Release 10 of Cisco WAN Manager supports the following connections:

•

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)

ATM Router Processor Module

VISM

Frame Relay (FR)

–

Frame Relay

Frame user network interface (FUNI)

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Starting Connection Manager

–

Frame forwarding

•

Circuit Emulation (CE)

Voice and Data service modules

Supported Card Types

Table 4-1 lists the types of cards supported in CWM and the different cards in each card type.

Table 4-1 Supported Card Types in CWM

Card Type

Cards Supported

ATM

AUSM (4T1, 4E1, 8T1, 8E1), AUSMB (8T1, 8E1), PXM (T3, E3, OC3,

OC12), ASI (T3, E3, OC3), ASI-155, BXM (OC3, OC12,T3, E3), UXM,

BXME (OC3, OC12)

AXSM, AXSMB

AXSM-OC3, AXSM-OC12, AXSM-OC48, AXSM-T3E3

CESM (4T1, 4E1, 8T1, 8E1, T3, E3)

Data Service Modules

CVM, UVM, HDM, LDM, SDP, LDP

FRSM (4T1, 4E1, 8T1, 8E1, HS1b.V35), FRM, UFM, FRP

FRSM (2CT3, 2E3, 2T3, HS2), FRSM (HS2B)

RPM-PR

FRSM-VHS

RPMB, RPM-PR

Voice Service Modules CVM, UVM, CDP, VISM

Starting Connection Manager

To start Connection Manager, first start the CWM Desktop from the CWM Main Menu, as described in

Chapter 2, “Starting and Stopping Cisco W AN Manager.” Then, to bring up the Connection Manager

application, either click on the CWM desktop window’s Connection Manager icon, or select

Connection Manager from the Apps pulldown menu. Both options are shown in Figure 4-1.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Starting Connection Manager

Figure 4-1 CWM Desktop Window

The CWM Connection Manager window is displayed in Figure 4-2. Use this window to browse the list

of established connections, as well as to invoke the other CWM Connection Manager features.

A New ATM-ATM connection option is shown in Figure 4-2. Use the File dropdown menu to select

New Connections and display a list of available connection options.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Starting Connection Manager

Figure 4-2 CWM Connection Manager Window

Platform, Card, and Connection Types

Platform Types

The following platforms are supported for provisioning XPVC user endpoints:

BPX 8600

AXIS 8220

•

MGX 8230, MGX 8250 and MGX 8850-R1

MGX 8850-R2

The following platforms are supported as via nodes, but are not supported for XPVC user endpoints

creation:

•

IGX 8400

Card Types

The following cards are supported for XPVC user endpoints:

•

BXM and BXM-E

ASI

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Starting Connection Manager

•

PXM1

AXSM

AUSM

FRSM

RPM

RPM-PR (can be on both MGX1 & MGX2)

The following cards are not supported as user endpoints:

•

CESM

VISM

Cards from IGX

XPVC Connection Types

Connection Types for AR-PNNI-AR XPVC

The following 3 segment XPVCs are allowed:

ATM-ATM

ATM-FR

FR-FR

•

AUSM-AUSM, AUSM-PXM1, AUSM-BXM, and AUSM - RPM/RPM-PR

PXM1-PXM1, PXM1-BXM, and PXM1 - RPM/RPM-PR

BXM-BXM, and BXM - RPM/RPM-PR

RPM/RPM-PR- RPM/RPM-PR

•

AUSM-FRSM

PXM1-FRSM

BXM-FRSM

RPM/RPM-PR - FRSM

•

FRSM-FRSM

Connection Types for AR-PNNI

ATM-ATM

•

AUSM-AXSM

PXM1-AXSM

BXM-AXSM

RPM-AXSM

AUSM - RPM-PR

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Starting Connection Manager

•

BXM - RPM-PR

PXM1 - RPM-PR

RPM/RPM-PR - RPM-PR

FR-ATM

•

FRSM-AXSM

FRSM - RPM-PR

Connection Types for AR-Hybrid

ATM-ATM

•

AUSM-AUSM, AUSM-PXM1, and AUSM-RPM/RPM-PR

PXM1-AUSM, PXM1-PXM1, and PXM1-RPM/RPM-PR

BXM-AUSM, BXM-PXM1, and BXM-RPM/RPM-PR

RPM/RPM-PR -AUSM, RPM-PXM1, and RPM/RPM-PR - RPM/RPM-PR

ATM-FR

FR-ATM

•

AUSM-FRSM

PXM1-FRSM

BXM-FRSM

RPM/RPM-PR - FRSM

•

FRSM-AUSM

FRSM-PXM1

FRSM - RPM/RPM-PR

Connection Manager Main Window

The Connection Manager main window includes the following components:

•

Menu bar—Provides available menu options for the connection manager application.

Tool bar—Contains the most frequently used actions in icon format.

Button panel—Contains navigational buttons.

Start node tree—Displays the full path of the currently selected node.

Filter settings tree—Displays the filter categories and values currently selected.

List of connections—Lists a subset of connections managed by CWM based on the selected start

node and filter values.

•

Status bar—Displays any errors or informational messages as you attempt to perform various

actions.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Starting Connection Manager

Menu Bar

The Connection Manager menu bar provides actions that you can select by pulling down the menu and

clicking on the desired action. The following menus and submenus are available:

•

File

–

New CM GUI—Opens a new instance of Connection Manager application. You can have up to

four instances of the Connection Manager running at any one time on a workstation.

–

New Connections—Displays a list of available connection types from which to select when

adding a new connection.

Close—When you are running multiple instances of the Connection Manager, selecting this

action closes the current Connection Manager main window. If you are running only one

instance, selecting this action returns you to the CWM main menu.

–

Edit

–

Exit—Exits the Connection Manager application.

•

Filters—Displays the Filter Settings Dialog Box.

–

Delete Template—Displays the Delete Template Dialog Box that lists the templates that can be

deleted.

View

–

XPVC Segments—Displays the XPVC Connection and Segments window.

Alarm Console—Displays the Alarm Console log.

MultiCast Group—Displays members of the MultiCast Group.

•

Diagnostic

–

Test Connection—Tests the integrity of a connection between a card and the remote end within

the WAN switching network by sending a single collection of supervisory cells to the remote

end. The terminal displays only a pass or fail message.

–

Test Delay—Externally tests the integrity of a connection by sending a single collection of

supervisory cells to the remote end of the network and back. The terminal displays a passor fail

message and the round trip time in milliseconds.

–

Search option

Connection Trace—Displays connection trace information.

Detailed Status—Displays detailed status and configuration information for a specified group.

Reroute—Displays the reroute timer settings.

Connection Up—Allows you to up a connection.

Connection Down—Allows you to down a connection.

Note

When trying to start Bert through the BERT GUI, the GUI allows you to change parameters that are not

applicable to AXSM-E T1 lines. From the GUI, the only configurable parameters are Inverse pattern at

TX, Inverse pattern at Rx, and Insert constant-rate error for AXSM-E T-1 lines.The other parameters

should not be modified.

•

Help

Help—Displays Connection Manager version information.

–

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Starting Connection Manager

Tool Bar

The Connection Manager tool bar contains icon buttons that access frequently used actions. The

following icons are available:

•

Delete Template

Edit Filter

Help

Button Panel

The Connection Manager button panel contains the following navigational buttons:

•

Apply—Allows you to apply selected filters to the list of connections.

Refresh—Allows you to refresh the list of connections from the Connection Manager server, but not

apply any new filters to the connections.

•

Modify—Allows you to modify a connection’s parameters.

Delete—Allows you to delete connections.

Start Node Tree

The Connection Manager Start Node Tree shows the network equipment that is being managed by CWM.

You can select any node from the hierarchy to be the current start node. The label on the top of this pane

shows the current selected node.

Filter Settings Tree

The Connection Manager Filter Settings Tree displays the filter categories and values currently selected.

Click the Apply button to review the selected connection types.

List of Connections

The Connection Manager List of Connections lists a subset of connections managed by CWM based on

the selected start node and filter values.

Status Bar

The Connection Manager Status Bar displays any errors or informational messages as you attempt to

perform various actions.

Alarms and Events

After selecting a node from the Start Node Tree, or any slot, line, or port under a node in the tree, and

then selecting the Apply button, the Connection Manager will update alarms and events on selected

connections under the following circumstances:

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Starting Connection Manager

•

The Connection Dialogue window appears with the number of connections matching the filtering

criteria. If you select Get All or Get <n> connections, and then select the OK button, the

connections will be listed in the List of Connections window. Any event or alarm for these

connections will now be dynamically refreshed.

The Connection Dialogue window appears with the number of connections as "0". In this case, the

user should select Get All and then select the OK button. Any event or alarm for all newly created

connections, with at least one endpoint on the selected node, will now be dynamically refreshed.

Note

If the newly added connections do not have at least one endpoint on the selected node, then no alarms or

events will be refreshed for those connections.

Configuring Connections

To configure a connection, complete the following steps:

Step 1

using Connection Manager.

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

If necessary, start CWM and launch the desktop.

Select Connection Manager.

Select a Connection Mode

Select a connection type from the list of connections.

Further configuration of your connection depends on the connection type. The following endpoints/cards

are supported in Release 10 of the CWM Connection Manager:

•

MGX 8220

–

FRSM-4, FRSM-8, and FRSM-HS1 (Frame Relay)

FRSM-VHS - 2CT3, 2E3, 2T3, and HS2 (Frame Relay)

AUSM-4 and AUSM-8 (ATM)

CESM-4 (T1, E1) and CESM-8 (T1, E1) (Circuit Emulation)

CESM-1 T3/E3 (Circuit Emulation)

HS2B card

•

MGX 8850 Release 1

–

FRSM-2CT3

FRSM- 2T3/E3

FRSM-HS2

FRSM-8 T1/E1

CESM-1 T3/E3

CESM-8 (Circuit Emulation)

PXM-UNI

VISM (T1, E1)

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Starting Connection Manager

–

HS2B card

•

MGX 8850 Release 2

–

PXM-45

RPM-PR

AXSM

AXSMB

•

BPX 8600

–

BXM and ASI (ATM)

BME

BXME

•

BPX with SES feeder node

BXM

IGX 8400

–

UXM (ATM)

FRM, UFM, and UFM-U (Frame Relay)

CVM and UVM (Voice)

CVM, HDM and LDM (Data)

SDP and LDP (Data)

Connection Modes

The CWM Connection Manager supports the following connection mode:

Normal—normal/regular PVCs

•

Configuration Management

Operations supported in Normal mode:

browse connection list

browse Root to Leaf connectivity for multicast

•

add a new connection

modify a connection

delete a connection

verify TestContinuity

verify TestDelay

Connection types supported in Normal mode:

•

Frame Relay to Frame Relay

ATM to ATM

ATM to Frame Relay

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -1 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Starting Connection Manager

•

CE to CE (Circuit Emulation)

Voic e t o Voice

Data to Data

ATM to CE

RPM to RPM

RPM to ATM

RPM to FR

VISM to ATM

VISM to VISM

Note

Verification of Test Continuity and Test Delay is not supported for connections that involve RPM

endpoints.

Connection Manager Window Menus

Menu options in the Connection Manager window are:

File - New Connection Manager

Select this option to start another instance of the Connection Manager program. You can have up to four

instances of the Connection Manager running at any one time on a workstation. Only one can be started

from the CWM Desktop; the others must be started from the File menu of one of the running programs.

File - Exit

Select this option to exit the Connection Manager. This option works only on the window in which the

option is selected. When you have started other Connection Managers, they continue to run.

View - View Multicast Connections

Select this option to browse multicast connections. This menu item remains disabled when the selected

connection is not the correct type for this option.

Configure - New FR-FR Connection

Select this option to create a new FR-FR connection.

Configure - New ATM-ATM Connection

Select this option to display a submenu, which allows you to view a new ATM-ATM Connection window

with fields appropriate to one of the following service types:

•

CBR.1

VBR.1 (NRT, VBR.1 RT)

VBR.2 (NRT, VBR.2 RT)

VBR.3 (NRT, VBR.3 RT)

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Starting Connection Manager

•

ABR.FS

ABR.1

UBR.1

UBR.2

ATFST

ATFXFST

ATFTFST

Configure - New ATM-RPMB Connection

Select this option to display a submenu, which allows you to view a new ATM-RPMB Connection

window with fields appropriate to one of the following service types:

•

VBR.3

ABR

UBR.1

UBR.2

Configure - New ATM-FR Connection

Select this option to display a submenu, which allows you to view a new ATM-FR Connection window

with fields appropriate to one of the following service types:

•

CBR.1

VBR.1

VBR.2

VBR.3

UBR.1

UBR.2

ABRFS

ABR.1

Configure - New CE-CE Connection

Select this option to create a new CE-CE connection.

Configure - New Voice Connection

Select this option to create a new Voice connection.

Configure - New Data Connection

Select this option to create a new Data connection.

Configure - New ATM-CE Connection

Select this option to create a new ATM-CE connection.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -1 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Starting Connection Manager

Configure - New ATM-VISM Connection

Select this option to create a new ATM-VISM connection.

Configure - New VISM-VISM

Select this option to create a new VISM-VISM connection.

Supported Connection Service Types and Protocols

Release 10 of Cisco WAN Manager supports the following connections:

•

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)

ATM Router Processor Module (ATM-RPM)

–

Frame Relay (FR)

ATM

RPM

•

Frame Relay

–

Frame User Network Interface (FUNI)

Frame Forwarding

•

Circuit Emulation (CE)

Voice and Data service modules

VISM

When adding a new connection from the Connection Manager application, you are asked to specify the

service type and protocol.

The following tables list the service type and protocol selections available for each connection type.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Starting Connection Manager

Table 4-2 ATM Connection and Protocol Types

Connection Type

Service Types

Protocols

ATM-ATM

cbr1

PVC

vbr1_nrt

vbr2_nrt

vbr3_nrt

vbr1_rt

vbr2_rt

vbr3_rt

abrfs

SPVC

Hybrid

abr1

ubr1

ubr2

ATFXFST

ATFTFST

ATM-Frame Relay

cbr1

PVC

vbr2_nrt

vbr3_nrt

vbr2_rt

vbr3_rt

abrfs

Hybrid

ubr1

ubr2

abr1

ATM-FUNI

cbr1

PVC

vbr2_nrt

vbr3_nrt

vbr2_rt

vbr3_rt

abrfs

Hybrid

ubr1

ubr2

abr1

ATM-Frame Forwarding

cbr1

PVC

vbr2_nrt

vbr3_nrt

vbr2_rt

vbr3_rt

abrfs

Hybrid

ubr1

ubr2

abr1

ATM-ATM (RPM)

vbr3_nrt

abr1

PVC

Hybrid

ubr1

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -1 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Starting Connection Manager

Table 4-2 ATM Connection and Protocol Types (continued)

Connection Type

Service Types

Protocols

ATM-CE

cbr1

PVC

Hybrid

ATM-VISM

cbr1

PVC

vbr1_rt

vbr2_rt

vbr3_rt

Table 4-3 ATM (RPM) Connection and Protocol Types

Connection Type

Service Types

vbr3_nrt

abr1

Protocols

ATM (RPMB)-ATM (RPMB)

PVC

Hybrid

SPVC

ubr1

ATM (RPMB)-Frame Relay

ATM (RPMB)-FUNI

vbr3_nrt

abr1

PVC

Hybrid

SPVC

ubr1

vbr3_nrt

abr1

PVC

Hybrid

SPVC

ubr1

ATM (RPMB)-Frame

Forwarding

vbr3_nrt

abr1

PVC

Hybrid

SPVC

ubr1

ATM (RPMB)-ATM

vbr3_nrt

abr1

PVC

Hybrid

SPVC

ubr1

Table 4-4 Fram e Relay Connection and Protocol Types

Connection Type

Service Types

Protocols

Frame Relay-Frame Relay

Without ForeSight

With ForeSight

PVC

Hybrid

Frame Relay-FUNI

Without ForeSight

With ForeSight

PVC

Hybrid

Frame Relay-Frame Forwarding Without ForeSight

With ForeSight

PVC

Hybrid

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Starting Connection Manager

Table 4-4 Fram e Relay Connection and Protocol Types (continued)

Connection Type

Service Types

Protocols

Frame Relay-ATM

cbr1

PVC

vbr2_nrt

vbr3_nrt

vbr2_rt

vbr3_rt

abrfs

Hybrid

ubr1

ubr2

abr1

Frame Relay-ATM (RPMB)

vbr3_nrt

abr1

PVC

Hybrid

ubr1

FUNI-Frame Relay

FUNI-FUNI

Without ForeSight

With ForeSight

PVC

Hybrid

Without ForeSight

With ForeSight

PVC

Hybrid

FUNI-Frame Forwarding

FUNI-ATM

Without ForeSight

With ForeSight

PVC

Hybrid

cbr1

PVC

vbr2_nrt

vbr3_nrt

vbr2_rt

vbr3_rt

abrfs

Hybrid

ubr1

ubr2

abr1

FUNI-ATM (RPM)

vbr3_nrt

PVC

Hybrid

Frame Forwarding-Frame Relay Without ForeSight

With ForeSight

PVC

Hybrid

Frame Forwarding-FUNI

Without ForeSight

With ForeSight

PVC

Hybrid

Frame Forwarding-Frame

Forwarding

Without ForeSight

With ForeSight

PVC

Hybrid

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -1 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Starting Connection Manager

Table 4-4 Fram e Relay Connection and Protocol Types (continued)

Connection Type

Service Types

Protocols

Frame Forwarding-ATM

cbr1

PVC

vbr2_nrt

vbr3_nrt

vbr2_rt

vbr3_rt

abrfs

Hybrid

ubr1

ubr2

abr1

Frame Forwarding-ATM

(RPMB)

vbr3_nrt

ubr1

PVC

Hybrid

abr1

Table 4-5 CE Connection and Protocol Types

Connection Type

Service Types

Protocols

CE-CE

cbr1

PVC

Hybrid

CE-ATM

cbr1

PVC

Hybrid

Table 4-6 Voice and Data Connection and Protocol Types

Connection Type

Data-Data

Service Types

Data

Protocols

PVC

Voice-Voice

Voice

PVC

Table 4-7 VISM Connection and Protocol Types

Connection Type

Service Types

Protocols

VISM-ATM

cbr1

PVC

vbr1_rt

vbr1_nrt

VISM-VISM

cbr1

PVC

vbr1_rt

vbr1_nrt

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Filter Settings

Table 4-8 Private Line Connection and Protocol Types

Connection Type

Service Types

Protocols

CE-CE

cbr1

PVC

Hybrid

Filter Settings

The Filter Settings feature allows you to filter connections using the following criteria: Type, Status,

Multicast, Enabling Categories, Remote, Connection Descriptor, and End Point Filter Levels.

You can invoke the Filter Settings from:

•

Connection Manager Main Window - select Edit->Filters menu entry. The seven filter categories

are displayed in the Filter Settings Window.

•

Select the desired settings and click the OK button.

Switch Compatibility

Release 10 of CWM can manage connections on the following types of WAN switches or concentrators:

•

BPX® 8600 series wide-area switch running switch software 9.1, 9.2, or 9.3

IGX™ 8400 series wide-area switch running switch software 9.1, 9.2, or 9.3

MGX™ 8220 edge concentrator using firmware versions 4.0, 4.1, or 5.0

MGX 8230 Release 1 using firmware version 10.0 (PXM1)

MGX 8250 Release 1 using firmware version 10.0 (PXM1)

MGX 8850 Release 1 using firmware version 10.0 (PXM1)

MGX 8850 Release 2 using firmware version 2.0 (PXM45)

BPX 8600 services wide-area switch running switch software 9.2.33 with BPX-SES PNNI

Controller running firmware version 1.0.00, 1.0.01, or 1.0.10

Supported Cards

Release 10 of CWM supports the following card types for various connections:

Frame Relay

Service modules for Frame Relay (FR):

•

FRSM (4T1,4E1,8T1,8E1), FRSM-HS1b.V35 cards for MGX 8220, MGX 8230, MGX 8250,

Release 1 MGX 8850

•

UFM, FRM cards in IGX

The following FRSM-VHS service modules are supported on MGX 8220, MGX 8230, MGX 8250, and

Release 1 of MGX 8850:

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -1 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Supported Cards

•

FRSM-2CT3

FRSM-2T3

FRSM-HS2B

FRSM-2E3

FRSM-2HS2

Both FR and FRSM-VHS service modules support the following types of ports:

•

Frame Relay

FUNI

Frame Forwarding

Note

For FRSM cards, the port information is shown as follows:

Line_number.Physical_portnumber[Logical_portnumber](PortSpeed). The Logical port number is

typically shown on the CLI when using the dspports command, however CWM uses the physical port

number for connection provisioning.

ATM with PVC Connections

Service modules for ATM (unicast) connections:

•

AUSM (4T1, 4E1, 8T1, 8E1) in MGX 8220.

AUSM-B (8T1, 8E1) in MGX 8220, MGX 8230, MGX 8250, and Release 1 MGX 8850.

–

These cards support both ATM and IM-ATM ports.

•

PXM in MGX 8850.

ASI, ASI-155, BXM, and BXM-E in BPX.

UXM in IGX.

BME in BPX (only card supporting ATM multicast connections).

RPMB in MGX 8230, MGX 8250, and Release 1 MGX 8850 (unicast connections).

RPM-PR

Circuit Emulation (CE)

Service modules for Circuit Emulation:

•

CESM-4T1 and CESM-4E1 in MGX 8220 only

CESM-8T1 and CESM-8E1 in MGX 8230, MGX 8250, and Release 1 MGX 8850

CESM-T3 and CESM-E3 in MGX 8230, MGX 8250, and Release 1 MGX 8850

Voice

Service modules for Voice:

CVM and UVM in IGX

•

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

Real Time VBR Feature

•

CDP in IPX

Note

IPX has been declared ‘End Of Life’ in switch software 9.1.

Data

Service modules for Data:

•

HDM, LDM, UVM, CVM: IGX

VISM 8T1/8E1

Real Time VBR Feature

Network Support

This feature is supported on network trunks running switch software 9.2.30 or later on the trunk cards

BXM, BNI, UXM (only).

ATM Service Module Support

This feature is supported on the BXM, UXM, ASI service modules. Currently, CWM Release 10 does

not support rt-vbr connections involving PXM cards (however PXM-FR rt-vbr connection are

supported).

FR Service Module Support

This feature is supported only on FRQOS service modules.

PVC Connections Supported by Release 10 of CWM

Table 4-9 lists the Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) connection types supported by Release 10 of CWM.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -2 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

PVC Connections Supported by Release 10 of CWM

Table 4-9 PVC Connections Types

Remote

Local Endpoint Endpoint Card

Connection

CWM Service

Card Type

Type

Comments or Restrictions

FR-FR

none

Choice of FR port types;

choice of ForeSight features;

no QOS support

FRQOS

FR,

FRQOS

Choice of FR port types;

FR-FR

none

ForeSight enabled for QOS types ubr and abr;

Following QOS specified by ‘ChanServType’ attribute

on FRSM-VHS SM:

hi_priority, ubr, nrt-vbr, rt-vbr, abr

nrt-vbr3,abr.fs

ATM

ATM-FR

Choice of FR port types;

no QOS support on FR endpoint;

abr.fs not supported with ATM PXM service module

cbr1,

FRQOS

Choice of FR port types;

ubr(1,2),

nrt-vbr(2,3),

abr.fs

QOS supported on FR endpoint

ubr(1,2)

rt-vbr(2,3)

ATM

FRQOS

ATM-FR

Choice of FR port types;

QOS supported on FR endpoint;

ForeSight for abr.fs only;

abr.fs not supported with ATM PXM service module

nrt-vbr3

RPMB

ATM

ATM-FR

ATM-ATM

Choice of FR port types;

no QOS support on FR endpoint

FRQOS

ATM

Choice of FR port types;

QOS supported on FR endpoint

cbr1,

No Foresight (except for abr.fs);

nrt-vbr(1,2,3),

ubr(1,2),

abr.1,abr.fs

rt-vbr available only if both network and service

modules support ‘rt’ feature;

no ForeSight supported with cbr and with PXM cards

rt-vbr(1,2,3)

ATM

ATM-ATM

No Foresight;

real time feature should be supported by the network

and the ATM service modules

atfst. atfxt, atft- ATM (BXM)

txt

ATM (BXM)

ATM-ATM

ForeSight supported;

both endpoints should be BXM/BXM-E cards

cbr1,

ATM-Multicast ATM-Multicast

No Foresight (except for abr.fs);

multicast connection;

local and remote port combinations: root-root,

root-leaf

nrt-vbr(1,2,3),

ubr(1,2),

abr.1,abr.fs

nrt-vbr3

abr1

ubr1

ATM/RPM

VISM

ATM/RPM

ATM

ATM-ATM

VISM-ATM

No Foresight;

one or both endpoint router service modules

cbr1

vbr1_rt

vbr1_nrt

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

PVC Connections Supported by Release 10 of CWM

Table 4-9 PVC Connections Types

Remote

Local Endpoint Endpoint Card

Connection

CWM Service

Card Type

Type

Comments or Restrictions

cbr1

VISM

VISM-VISM

vbr1_rt

vbr1_nrt

CE-CE

cbr

Structured/unstructured;

both endpoints must be either structured or

unstructured with matching bandwidth and interface

type.

ATM-CE

CE structured or unstructured;

ATM endpoint bandwidth should be equal to or

greater than the CE endpoint bandwidth

Data-Data

none

Data service

module

Data service

module

Connection routing path cannot include BPX

Voice-Voice

Voice service

module

Voice service

module

Connection routing path cannot include BPX

Table 4-10 lists the cards that belong to the various endpoint card types.

Table 4-10 Card Types

Card Type

Cards

FRSM(4T1,4E1,8T1,8E1, HS1b.V35),

FRM,

UFM,

FRP

FRQOS

ATM

FRSM(2CT3,2E3,2T3,HS2) , HS2B

AUSM(4T1,4E1,8T1,8E1),

AUSMB(8T1,8E1),

PXM

ASI, ASI-155,

BXM,

BXM-E,

UXM

(only BXM, BXM-E and UXM support rt-vbr)

ATM-Multicast

BME

CESM(4T1,4E1,8T1,8E1,T3,E3)

RPM-PR

RPMB

Voice service module

CVM,

UVM,

CDP

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -2 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

PVC Connections Supported by Release 10 of CWM

Table 4-10 Card Types (continued)

Card Type

Data service module

Cards

CVM,

UVM,

HDM,

LDM,

SDP,

LDP

VISM

VISM 8T1/E1

Note

In this release, Multicast connections are not supported from the Connection Manager GUI.

Table 4-11 lists the cards that belong to the various endpoint card types.

Table 4-11 Card Types

Card Type

Cards

ATM (AXSM),

(AXSMB)

AXSM in MGX 8850 Release 2

ATM (BXM)

BXM in BPX

Modifying Connection Parameters

From the Connection Management main window, select a node and click the Apply button to view

connections and the status of connections on the selected node. Select a connection with a status of

“O.K.” Click the Modify button at the bottom of this screen to bring up a modification window for the

selected connection. The new Modify Connection window displays information about the selected

connection, and presents editable parameters in the far right column of the screen.

You can expand or collapse the Modify Connection and All Parameters windows by clicking the right

and left arrows at the top of the screen in between these windows.

For an ATM-ATM connection with VBR Service Type, the editable connection parameters are as

follows:

•

Ingress UPC Parameters

–

PCR0-1(cps): Peak Cell Rate- A value that defines a rate limitation for ATM traffic used in the

ingress policing algorithm. In general, traffic arriving at rates greater than the PCR are

discarded.

–

CDVT0+1(usec): Cell Delay Variation Tolerance for the first leaky bucket, which applies to

cells with CLP(0+1). CDVT is the maximum time for accumulated violations of cell-arrival

time parameters.

–

SCR0+1(cps): Sustainable Cell Rate- The guaranteed sustainable rate for an ATM connection.

Associated with the policing function used on ingress for VBR and ABR connections.

MBS(cells): Maximum Burst Size in cells. This is the maximum number of cells that may burst

at the PCR but are still compliant. This is used to determine the Burst Tolerance (BT) which

controls the time scale over which the Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is policed..

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

PVC Connections Supported by Release 10 of CWM

–

Enable AAL5 FBTC: AAL5 Frame Basic Traffic Control: To enable the possibility of

discarding the whole frame, not just one non-compliant cell. This is used to set the Early Packet

Discard bit at every node along a connection.

Policing Model: When a connection is added, a VPI.VCI address is assigned, and UPC

parameters are configured for the connection. For each cell in an ATM stream, the VPI.VCI

addresses are verified and each cell is checked for compliance with UPC parameters.

•

CAC & Rate Parameters

–

ECR Enable: Equivalent Cell Rate. The CAC (Connection Admission Control) algorithm

calculates the ECR of a connection prior to establishing the connection, and ensures high

efficiency of network resources.

Note

If ECR is enabled, CWM will calculate %utilization using the CAC_calc.txt file. The ECR for

Enhanced CAC is allowed only for BXM, ASI and AUSM cards for PVC connections. Therefore

%utilization becomes a greyed out, and the user is not able to enter values in this data field.

–

Utilization(%): Is the bandwidth allocation for rt/nrt (real time/ non real time). For Vbr, Cbr,

and Ubr it’s PCR%Util; for Abr it’s MCR%Util. Range: 0-100%.

MCR(cps): Minimum Cell Rate- The minimum VC queue service rate for an ABR ATM

connection.

•

Connection Descriptor

–

The connection descriptor is independently configurable at each end of a connection. Character

Limitations: None. Range: The Descriptor field will take any number of characters, but will

only display 64. To activate the Connection Descriptor feature, the following configuration

steps will need to be followed. Using the command line interface (CLI) as user svplus:

a. cd/usr/users/svplus/conf

b. vi CwmDomainGlobal.conf

# Cwm Global Across the Domain Configuration File

# <Name> = <Value>

DESCRIPTOR_FLAG=0 (on=1, off=0)

c. Change the flag to 1 (on)

d. write and quit the file (:wq!)

e. Stop and restart the CWM core.

•

Routing Parameters

–

Avoid Trunk Type: This type is applicable only when a connection involves multiple routing

nodes. Routing is not involved when a connection originates and terminates on the same routing

node. That is, when originating and terminating endpoints are using the same routing node, this

parameter is not applicable and is made insensitive. (Greyed out).

Reroute Priority: This type is applicable only when a connection involves multiple routing

nodes. Routing is not involved when a connection originates and terminates on the same routing

node. That is, when originating and terminating endpoints are using the same routing node, this

parameter is not applicable and is made insensitive. (Greyed out).

Enable Cell Routing: Enables Cell Routing on a connection.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -2 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

PVC Connections Supported by Release 10 of CWM

–

Use Trunks Using ZCS: This type is applicable only when a connection involves multiple

routing nodes. Routing is not involved when a connection originates and terminates on the same

routing node. That is, when originating and terminating endpoints are using the same routing

node, this parameter is not applicable and is made insensitive. (Greyed out).

–

Preferred Route: This type is applicable only when a connection involves multiple routing

nodes. Routing is not involved when a connection originates and terminates on the same routing

node. That is, when originating and terminating endpoints are using the same routing node, this

parameter is not applicable and is made insensitive. (Greyed out).

Override CAC: Connection Admission Control. An ATM function which determines whether a

virtual circuit VC) connection request should be accepted or rejected. Override CAC allows an

override option for this function.

–

Route Master: The initial point of a route request.

Current Route: The current traffic route.

Click on the parameter you would like to edit, then click on the Edit button at the bottom of the All

Parameters window.

An Edit screen appears with all editable parameters. Make any necessary changes. Click the Apply

button. All values are saved. Click O.K. and you are returned to the Modify Connection screen.

After applying modifications to a connection, you can save changes to a connection template for later

use by clicking Save Template. Also, you can select Load Template to retrieve a previously modified

connection template.

For an ATM-ATM connection with CBR Service Type, the editable connection parameters are as

follows:

•

Ingress UPC Parameters

–

PCR0+1(cps): Specifies the transmit/receive Peak Cell Rate (PCR) for cells leaving the first

leaky bucket on the ASI card with CLP(0+1). Applies to only CBR connections. In general,

traffic arriving at rates greater than the PCR are dicarded.

–

CDVT0+1(usec): Cell Delay Variation Tolerance for the first leaky bucket, which applies to

cells with CLP(0+1). CDVT is the maximum time for accumulated violations of cell-arrival

time parameters.

•

CAC & Rate Parameters

–

CDV(usec): Cell Delay Variation. The maximum allowable delay variation through a network

for a circuit emulation connection.

–

CTD(msecs): Cell Transfer Delay. The maximum delay incurred by a cell (including

propagation and buffering delays.)

Connection Descriptor

–

The connection descriptor is independently configurable at each end of a connection. Character

Limitations: None. Range: The Descriptor field will take any number of characters, but will

only display 64. To activate the Connection Descriptor feature, the following configuration

steps will need to be followed. Using the command line interface (CLI) as user svplus:

a. cd/usr/users/svplus/conf

b. vi CwmDomainGlobal.conf

# Cwm Global Across the Domain Configuration File

# <Name> = <Value>

DESCRIPTOR_FLAG=0 (on=1, off=0)

c. Change the flag to 1 (on)

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

PVC Connections Supported by Release 10 of CWM

d. write and quit the file (:wq!)

e. Stop and restart the CWM core.

•

Routing Parameters

–

Max Cost: Maximum cost size in cells.

Frame Discard: If frame-based traffic control is enabled, the EPD threshold determines when to

start discarding an AAL5 frame.

–

Connection Segments: An ABR connection can be divided into separately controlled ABR

segments.

•

Features

–

Stats Enable: Enables statistics on a selected connection.

CC Enable: Congestion Control Enable. A 22-bit field in the header of the STI cell that is used

to report congestion messages to the source service interface for the ForeSight feature.

SCT Vc Parameters

–

Service Type: The service type (i.e. CBR, VBR, ABR) to which the parameters apply.

Service Category: The service category to which the service type belongs. All service types that

belong to the same service category should be mapped to the same Class of Service Buffer.

Access: read only. Values: 0-65535.

–

Cosb Number: The Class of Service Buffer number associated with the service type. Access:

read-write. Values: 1-16.

CAC Treatment: Connection Admission Control. The CAC algorithms that are supported are:

1) lcnCac, 2) eCac-Model A, 3) eCac-Model B, 4) eCac-Model C, 5) eCac-Model D, 6)

eCac-Model E, 7) eCac-Model F, 8) mbBwCac. DEFVAL {2}. Access: read-write. Values:

1-256.

–

UPC Enable: Selectively enables or disables UPC policing on this virtual circuit. Access:

read-write. Values: enableAll(1), enableGera1(2), enable Gera2(3), enable

Gera1WithPktPolicing(5), enable Gera2WithPktPolicing(6).

UPC CLP Selection: Usage Parameter Control- Cell Loss Priority Select. Enables or disables

GCRA policing functions on the connection. GCRA1-ENB: Enables GCRA1 only. GCRA 1&2:

Enables both GCRA1 & GCRA2.

GCRA No1 Policing Action: Generic Cell Rate Algorithm- Bucket 1. In ATM an algorithm that

defines conformance with respect to the traffic contract of the connection. For each cell arrival

the GCRA determines whether the cell conforms to the traffic contract.

GCRA No2 Policing Action: Generic Cell Rate Algorithm- Bucket 2. In ATM an algorithm that

defines conformance with respect to the traffic contract of the connection. For each cell arrival

the GCRA determines whether the cell conforms to the traffic contract.

Peak Cell Rate (PCR): The peak (maximum) cell rate for a connection using this service type.

This value is a percentage of the maximum cell rate for the logical interface. 1000000 is equal

to 100%. Range and Units: 0-1000000.

Sustained Cell Rate (SCR): The sustained cell rate for a connection using this service type. This

value is a percentage of the maximum cell rate for the logical interface. 1000000 is equal to

100%. Range and Units: 0-1000000.

Min Cell Rate (MCR): The minimum cell rate for a connection using this service type. This

value is a percentage of the maximum cell rate for the logical interface. 1000000 is equal to

100%. Range and Units: 0-1000000.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -2 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

PVC Connections Supported by Release 10 of CWM

–

Initial Cell Rate (ICR): The cell rate used to begin a transmission on a connection that has been

idle for a configured period of time. This value is a percentage of the PCR for the logical

interface. 1000000 is equal to 100%. (Used only on ABR service type connections.) Range and

Units: 0-1000000.

–

Max Burst Size(MBS): The maximum number of cells that may arrive at a rate equal to the PCR.

Used for policing. Range and Units: 1-5000000.

–

Max Frame Size(MFS): The maximum AAL5 frame size in cells.

Cell Delay Variation Tolerance(CDVT): Specifies the transmit/receive Cell Delay Variation

Tolerance for the second leaky bucket. The second bucket applies to cells with CLP(0). CDVT

is the maximum time for accumulated violations of cell-arrival time parameters.

–

VC Packet Discard Mode: Enables or disables Packet Discard Mode on the connection. Range

and units: 1=enabled; 2=disabled.

Max Threshold: The VcMax Threshold for CLP (0+1) cells in microseconds. Range and units:

0-5000000 microseconds.

CLP (1) High Threshold: Cell Loss Priority High Threshold (% of VC QMax) is the highest

threshold for the bit in the header of an ATM cell that identifies the cell as eligible for discard

within the network under predefined congestion conditions. Most often set by the ingress

policing function.

–

CLP (1) Low or EPDs (1): Cell Loss Priority Low Threshold (% of VC QMax)/ Early Packet

Discard. If AAL5 FBTC = yes, then for the BXM card this is the EPD threshold setting. EPDs

is the lowest threshold for the bit in the header of an ATM cell that identifies the cell as eligible

for discard within the network under predefined congestion conditions.

–

EPD Threshold: Early Packet Discard Threshold. The maximum threshold for CLP (0+1) cells.

This value is a percentage of the MAX_CELL THRESH for the connection. 1000000 is equal

to 100%. Range and value: 0-1000000.

EFCI Threshold: Explicit Forward Congestion Indication. The VC EFCI discard threshold. This

value is a percentage of MAX_CELL THRESH. 1000000 is equal to m100%. Range and values:

0-1000000.

Class of Service Scaling: Class of Service Scaling provides a means of scaling through a set of

extended parameters, which are generally platform specific, based on a set of standard ATM

parameters passed to the VSI slave during connection set up.

–

CI Control: Congestion Indication Control. Indicates whether the EFCI Threshold has been

exceeded.

VSVD: Virtual Source/ Virtual Destination. A VSVD is an ABR connection which may be

divided into two or more separately controlled ABR segments. Each ABR control segment ,

except the first, is sourced by a virtual source. Sources and destinations are linked via

bi-directional connections, and each connection termination point is both a source and a

destination, a source for data that is transmitting, and a destination for data that is receiving.

–

ACR Decrease Time Factor: Allowed Cell Rate Decrease Time Factor. Sets the Decrease Time

Factor for the VC queue service rate being used on an ABR connection.

ABR Rate Decrease Factor: Available Bit Rate-Rate Decrease Factor. Sets the Rate Decrease

Factor on an ABR variable rate ATM service type utilizing the ForeSight algorithm for

congestion avoidance.

–

Rate Increase Factor(RIF): A percentage increase in the allowable cell rate for an ABR

connection if the BRM cells do not have the N1 or C1 bits set.

Number of Data Cells Between FRM Cells

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

PVC Connections Supported by Release 10 of CWM

–

Time Between Fwd RM Cells

Transient Buffer Exposure(TBE): The number of RM cells that can be sent out by a virtual

source before waiting for a BRM cell in return.

–

Fixed Round Trip Time (in microseconds): The amount of delay expected for an RM cell to

travel through the network to the destination and back again.

per-VC Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ): Weighted Fair Queuing is an approximation of the

Generalized Processor Sharing (GPS) scheduling. WFQ can be generally used to give

performance guarantees to connections carrying best-effort packet traffic, where each

connection can be guaranteed bandwidth in proportion to its weight and in a fair manner.

•

SCT Cosb Parameters

–

Cosb Number: Class of Service Buffer Number. The number that identifies one of the sixteen

Cosb buffers. A Cosb buffer is a buffer that services connections with similar QoS requirements.

Range and units:1-16.

–

Cosb MinRate: This field is no longer used and is currently always set to its default value (0).

Range and units: 1- 1000000.

Cosb MaxReservableRate: This field is no longer used and is currently always set to its default

value (100). Range and units: 1- 1000000.

Min Priority: The priority at which this COSB will be serviced to guarantee it minimum and

maximum bandwidth requirements. Highest priority = 0; Lowest priority = 15. Range and units:

0-15.

–

Excess Priority: The priority at which this COSB will be given access to excess bandwidth.

Highest priority = 0; Lowest priority = 15. Range and units: 0-15.

Cosb Max Threshold: Class of Service Buffer Maximum Threshold. This value is a percentage

of MAX_CELL THRESH. 1000000 is equal to 100%. Range and values: 0-1000000.

Cosb CLP (1) High Threshold: Class of Service Buffer Cell Loss Priority. This value is a

percentage of MAX_CELL THRESH. 1000000 is equal to 100%. Range and values: 0-1000000.

Cosb EPD (0) Threshold: Class of Service Buffer Early Packet Discard Threshold. The

maximum threshold for CLP (0+1) cells. This value is a percentage of the MAX_CELL

THRESH for the connection. 1000000 is equal to 100%. Range and value: 0-1000000.

–

EFCI Threshold: Explicit Forward Congestion Indication. The VC EFCI discard threshold. This

value is a percentage of MAX_CELL THRESH. 1000000 is equal to m100%. Range and values:

0-1000000.

–

Explicit Rate Stamping: Indicates whether Explicit Rate Stamping (ERS) is enabled or disabled.

Range and units: 1=enabled; 2=disabled.

Random Early Discard Selection(RED): RED will drop packets from queues on a random basis

in order to avoid buffer overflow. RED is accomplished by dropping packets on a random basis,

which is determined statistically, when the mean queue depth exceeds a threshold over a period

of time, effectively advising the packet source router to decrease its packet rate.

–

Random Early Discard Threshold: The threshold at which the COSB Random Early Discard

(RED) is activated. This threshold is a percentage of the MAX_CELL THRESH for the

connection. 1000000 is equal to 100%. Range and units: 0-1000000.

Random Early Discard Probability Factor: The mantissa value of probability for maximum

discard when RED is activated. Determined as 1/2^<value>.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -2 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

PVC Connections Supported by Release 10 of CWM

–

WFQ Enable: Weighted Fair Queuing. WFQ queues traffic in separate queues, according to

traffic class definition, guaranteeing each queue some portion of the total available bandwidth.

WFQ recognizes when a particular queue is not fully utilizing its allocated bandwidth and

portions that capacity out to the other queues on a proportionate basis. This is done by

portioning out available bandwidth on the basis of individual information flows according to

their message parameters.

–

Best Effort Indicator: A Quality of Service Class in which no specific traffic parameters and no

absolute guarantees are provided. Best Effort includes UBR and ABR Service Types.

Enable/disable Discard Alarm per VC: Indicates whether Discard Alarm has been enabled or

disabled. Range and units: 1=enabled; 2=disabled.

Cosb CLP (1) High Threshold: Class of Service Buffer- Cells Loss Priority High. The high

hysteresis threshold at which CLP (1) cells will be discarded. The cells will continue to be

discarded until the CLP_LO threshold is reached. This value is a percentage of MAX_CELL

THRESH. 1000000 is equal to 100%. Range and units: 0-1000000.

Click on the parameter you would like to edit, then click on the Edit button at the bottom of the All

Parameters window.

An Edit screen appears with all editable parameters. Make any necessary changes. Click the Apply

button. All values are saved. Click O.K. and you are returned to the Modify Connection screen.

After applying modifications to a connection, you can save changes to a connection template for later

use by clicking Save Template. Also, you can select Load Template to retrieve a previously modified

connection template.

For an ATM-ATM connection with ABR Service Type, the editable connection parameters are as

follows:

•

Ingress UPC Parameters

–

PCR0+1(cps): Peak Cell Rate- A value that defines a rate limitation for ATM traffic used in the

ingress policing algorithm. In general, traffic arriving at rates greater than the PCR are

discarded.

CDVT0+1(usec): Cell Delay Variation Tolerance for the first leaky bucket, which applies to

cells with CLP(0+1). CDVT is the maximum time for accumulated violations of cell-arrival

time parameters.

MBS(cells): Maximum Burst Size in cells. This is the maximum number of cells that may burst

at the PCR but are still compliant. This is used to determine the Burst Tolerance (BT) which

controls the time scale over which the Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is policed.

Enable AAL5 FBTC: AAL5 Frame Basic Traffic Control: To enable the possibility of

discarding the whole frame, not just one non-compliant cell. This is used to set the Early Packet

Discard bit at every node along a connection.

Policing Model: Available Bit Rate (ABR) connections are policed in the same manner as the

Vbr connections, but in addition use either the ABR Standard with VSVD congestion flow

control method or the ForeSight option to take advantage of unused bandwidth when it is

available.

•

CAC & Rate Parameters

–

Utilization (%): Is the bandwidth allocation for rt/nrt (real time/ non real time). For Vbr, Cbr,

and Ubr it’s PCR%Util; for Abr it’s MCR%Util. Range: 0-100%.

–

MCR(cps): Minimum Cell Rate. A minimum cell rate committed for delivery by the network.

ICR(cps): Initial Cell Rate. The rate at which a source should send initially and after an idle

period. MCR-PCR cells per second.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

PVC Connections Supported by Release 10 of CWM

–

Rate Up: Specifies the increment in cell rate when the rate goes up. The Foresight Rate Up

increment is in cells per second per adjustment

Rate Down: Specifies large reductions in the transmit/receive cell rate. This ForeSight Rate

Down value is a percentage of the current rate.

ADTF/IcrTimeout(millisec): Allowed-cell-rate Decrease Time Factor/Initial-cell-rate

Time-out. The time between RM cells before the allowable cell rate returns to the initial cell

rate.

–

TRM/MinAdjust Period(millisec): Time RM/Minimal Adjustment Period. The maximum

amount of time between RM cells on an ABR connection.

•

Connection Descriptor

–

The connection descriptor is independently configurable at each end of a connection. Character

Limitations: None. Range: The Descriptor field will take any number of characters, but will

only display 64. To activate the Connection Descriptor feature, the following configuration

steps will need to be followed. Using the command line interface (CLI) as user svplus:

a. cd/usr/users/svplus/conf

b. vi CwmDomainGlobal.conf

# Cwm Global Across the Domain Configuration File

# <Name> = <Value>

DESCRIPTOR_FLAG=0 (on=1, off=0)

c. Change the flag to 1 (on)

d. write and quit the file (:wq!)

e. Stop and restart the CWM core.

•

Routing Parameters

–

Avoid Trunk Type: This type is applicable only when a connection involves multiple routing

nodes. Routing is not involved when a connection originates and terminates on the same routing

node. That is, when originating and terminating endpoints are using the same routing node, this

parameter is not applicable and is made insensitive. (Greyed out).

–

Reroute Priority: This type is applicable only when a connection involves multiple routing

nodes. Routing is not involved when a connection originates and terminates on the same routing

node. That is, when originating and terminating endpoints are using the same routing node, this

parameter is not applicable and is made insensitive. (Greyed out).

–

Enable Cell Routing: Enables Cell Routing on a connection.

Use Trunks Using ZCS: This type is applicable only when a connection involves multiple

routing nodes. Routing is not involved when a connection originates and terminates on the same

routing node. That is, when originating and terminating endpoints are using the same routing

node, this parameter is not applicable and is made insensitive. (Greyed out).

–

Preferred Route: This type is applicable only when a connection involves multiple routing

nodes. Routing is not involved when a connection originates and terminates on the same routing

node. That is, when originating and terminating endpoints are using the same routing node, this

parameter is not applicable and is made insensitive. (Greyed out).

Override CAC: Connection Admission Control. An ATM function which determines whether a

virtual circuit VC) connection request should be accepted or rejected. Override CAC allows an

override option for this function.

–

Route Master: The initial point of a route request.

Current Route: The current traffic route.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -3 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

PVC Connections Supported by Release 10 of CWM

•

UPC Thresholds

–

Hi CLP(% of VCQ): Cell Loss Priority High Threshold (% of VC QMax) is the highest

threshold for the bit in the header of an ATM cell that identifies the cell as eligible for discard

within the network under predefined congestion conditions. Most often set by the ingress

policing function.

–

Lo CLP(% of VCQ): Cell Loss Priority Low Threshold (% of VC QMax) is the lowest threshold

for the bit in the header of an ATM cell that identifies the cell as eligible for discard within the

network under predefined congestion conditions.

Vc Queue size (VCQ): A FIFO (First In First Out) buffer that is created for each connection

when the connection is added. VC_Queue has configurable thresholds for EFCI, CLP Hi, CLP

Lo. For ABR connections, cells move from VC_Queues to QBINs at the Allowed Cell Rate

(ACL) as determined by the ATM Forum ABR algorithm or the Cisco Foresight algorithm.

–

EFCI Queue Size(% of VCQ): Explicit Forward Congestion Indication. The VC EFCI discard

threshold. This value is a percentage of MAX_CELL THRESH. 1000000 is equal to m100%.

Range and values: 0-1000000.

•

Flow Control Service

–

Enable BCM: Backward Congestion Management.

Enable VSVD: Virtual Source/ Virtual Destination. A VSVD is an ABR connection which may

be divided into two or more separately controlled ABR segments. Each ABR control segment,

except the first, is sourced by a virtual source. Sources and destinations are linked via

bi-directional connections, and each connection termination point is both a source and a

destination, a source for data that is transmitting, and a destination for data that is receiving.

The forward direction is defined as from source to destination, and the backward direction is

defined as from destination to source. Enable VSVD enables this Flow Control Service.

–

NRM(cells): Number RM. The maximum number of data cells that can be sent before sending

an RM cell on an ABR connection.

TBE(cells): Transient Buffer Exposure. The number of RM cells that can be sent out by a virtual

source before waiting for a BRM cell in return.

FRTT(millisec): Fixed Round-Trip Time. The amount of delay expected for an RM cell to travel

through the network to the destination and back again.

Click on the parameter you would like to edit, then click on the Edit button at the bottom of the All

Parameters window.

An Edit screen appears with all editable parameters. Make any necessary changes. Click the Apply

button. All values are saved. Click O.K. and you are returned to the Modify Connection screen.

After applying modifications to a connection, you can save changes to a connection template for later

use by clicking Save Template. Also, you can select Load Template to retrieve a previously modified

connection template.

XPVC Supported Connections

Autoroute one/two/three segment PVC can be transformed to two/three segment XPVC in two stages:

deletion of PVC & addition of SPVC. The SPVC of the resulting XPVC will replace/substitute/extend

one of the routing PVC leg of the original PVC multi-segment connection.

Note

XPVC connections can only be added by a proxy; not GUI.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

PVC Connections Supported by Release 10 of CWM

For the ATM - ATM (AUSM-AUSM 3 segment, BXM - BXM 1 segment) PVC & SPVC routing segment

is same for all ATM service types: cbr, rt-vbr, nrt-vbr, ubr, abrstd, abrfst.

For the FR - FR (FRSM-FRSM 3 segment), with atfr PVC middle segment, the SPVC segment type is

nrt-VBR.

For the FR - FR with foresight (FRSM-FRSM 3 segment) PVC, with atfst PVC middle segment, the

SPVC segment type is abrstd.

For the ATM (cbr, rt-vbr, nrt-vbr, ubr) - FR (FRSM - BXM 2 segment, AUSM - FRSM 3 segment) PVC,

the middle/routing segment is the same ATM type SPVC.

For the ATM (abrfst) - FR (FRSM - BXM 2 segment, AUSM - FRSM 3 segment) PVC, the

middle/routing segment is abrstd SPVC.

For the ATM - FR with foresight (atfst) PVC routing segment (only 2 segment supported) the

middle/routing segment is abrstd SPVC.

For the RPM-RPM (3 segment), RPM-ATM (2 or 3 segment), RPM-FR (2 or 3 segment)

nrt-VBR3/ubr1/abr1, the middle segment is nrt-VBR3/ubr1/abr1.

Note

ABRFST is not supported in SPVC model; these connections are converted to Standard ABR.

Table 4-12 lists Three Segment XPVC services and segments.

Table 4-12 Three Segm ent XPVC

AR Feeder

Segment 1

AR Routing

Segment 1

PNNI Routing

Segment

AR Routing

Segment 2

AR Feeder

Segment 2

XPVC Service

ATM- CBR,

rt-VBR,

ATM

nrt-VBR, UBR

ABRFS -

ABRFS

ABRFST

ABRSTD

without VsVd

ABRFST

ABRSTD

ABRFST

ABRSTD -

ABRSTD

ABRSTD with ABRSTD

Termination

ABRSTD

ABRSTD with

without VsVd without VsVd without VsVd Termination

ABRFS -

ABRSTD

ABRFST

ABRFST with ABRSTD

ABRSTD

ABRSTD with

FCES

ATFR

FST

without VsVd without VsVd Termination

FR-FR

nrt-VBR

ATFR

FST

FR-FR with

Foresight

FST

ABRSTD

FST

without VsVd

ATM-FR

ATFR

ATM

ATFR

(CBR,rt-VBR,

nrt-VBR,

UBR)

ATM-FR

Foresight

ATFST

ABRSTD

without VsVd

ATFST

ATM-RPM

nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1

nrt-VBR3/ubr1

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -3 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

PVC Connections Supported by Release 10 of CWM

Table 4-12 Three Segm ent XPVC (continued)

AR Feeder

Segment 1

AR Routing

Segment 1

PNNI Routing

Segment

AR Routing

Segment 2

AR Feeder

Segment 2

XPVC Service

ATM-RPM

abr1

abr1 with

termination

abr1 w/o

VSVD

abr1

abr1 w/o

VSVD

abr1 with

termination

RPM/

nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1

RPM-PR

RPM/RPM-PR

nrt-VBR3/ubr1

RPM/

abr1 with

termination

abr1 w/o

VSVD

abr1

abr1 w/o

VSVD

abr1 with

termination

RPM-PR

RPM/RPM-PR

abr1

RPM/

nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1

RPM-PR

- FR

nrt-VBR3/ubr1

RPM/

abr1 with

termination

abr1 w/o

VSVD

abr1

abr1 w/o

VSVD

abr1 with

termination

RPM-PR

- FR

abr1

Various AR PVC endpoints are listed in Table 4-13.

Table 4-13 Tw o Segm ent XPVC

AR Feeder

Segment

PNNI Routing

Segment

PNNI Feeder

Segment

XPVC Service

AR Segment

ABR - ABRFS ABRFST

ABRFST with ABRSTD

ABRSTD with

FCES

without VsVd Termination

ATM-FR

ATFR

ATM (CBR,

rt-VBR,

nrt-VBR,

UBR)

ATM (CBR,

rt-VBR,

nrt-VBR,

UBR)

ATM-FR

Foresight

ATFST

ATFST with

FCES

ABRSTD

without VsVd Termination

ABRSTD with

ATM-RPM

nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1

nrt-VBR3/ubr1

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

PVC Connections Supported by Release 10 of CWM

Table 4-13 Tw o Segm ent XPVC (continued)

AR Feeder

Segment

PNNI Routing

Segment

PNNI Feeder

Segment

XPVC Service

ATM-RPM

abr1

AR Segment

abr1 with

termination

abr1 w/o

VSVD

abr1

abr1 with

termination

RPM/

nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1

RPM-PR

RPM/RPM-PR

nrt-VBR3/ubr1

RPM/

abr1 with

termination

abr1 w/o

VSVD

abr1

abr1 with

termination

RPM-PR

RPM/RPM-PR

abr1

RPM/

nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1 nrt-VBR3/ubr1

RPM-PR

- FR

nrt-VBR3/ubr1

RPM/

abr1 with

termination

abr1 w/o

VSVD

abr1

abr1 with

termination

RPM-PR

- FR

abr1

SPVC & PVC parameters for a Newly Established XPVC

All the AR and PNNI common parameters are provided by users. The SCT fields for AXSM assigned

values are as per recommendation.

XPVC Connection and Segments

The following XPVC Connection and Segments window, as shown in Figure 4-3, appears after a

XPVC connection has been selected from the list of connections in the Connection Manager main

window, and after XPVC Segments has been selected from the View pulldown menu on the CWM main

menu bar. The XPVC Connection and Segments window can also be opened by right clicking on the

main window.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -3 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

PVC Connections Supported by Release 10 of CWM

Figure 4-3 XPVC Connection and Segm ents

Figure 4-4 shows a new ATM-ATM Connection window.

Figure 4-4 ATM to ATM Connection

Note

The VCI can be an asterick (*) to indicate the connection is a virtual path connection (so the VCI has

no meaning within the network). The VCI range is 1-65535.

Figure 4-5 shows the Filter settings dialog box with End to End type and Dangling Segments of XPVC

selected.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Connection Manager

PVC Connections Supported by Release 10 of CWM

Figure 4-5 Filter Settings, Dangling Segm ents of XPVC

Figure 4-6 shows the Filter settings dialog box with available Service Types selected.

Figure 4-6 Filter Settings Service Type

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

4 -3 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

Network Browser

This chapter describes how to use the Network Browser application, which is launched from the CWM

desktop. The Network Browser application provides a hierarchical representation of network elements,

including networks, nodes, cards, lines and ports, displayed in tree format in the left panel of the

Network Browser’s main window. Associated information about a selected network element is displayed

in table format in the right panel of the Network Browser window.

Each network element managed by Cisco WAN Manager (CWM) has its own attributes and fits into the

network’s physical or logical hierarchy. In Release 10 of CWM, the Network Browser presents the

network elements that are discovered, managed, and controlled in a hierarchical view for all networks

populated in the tables by CWM processes.

The Network Browser displays the network elements in a hierarchical format based on either a physical

or logical relationship among the various network elements. Networks are displayed at the root level of

the component tree, and nodes and trunks are displayed beneath the networks in a parent/child

relationship.

The Network Browser also displays informational messages in a multi-line text display; other types of

messages can be displayed in response to user actions.

Launching the Network Browser

To launch the Network Browser application, click on the Network Browser icon, which is found on the

Network Topology tool bar, or select the Network Browser application from the Apps pull-down menu

located on the main menu bar.

Note

Updates will not be reflected in the Network Browser if the CWM core is not running.

Main Window

After launching the Network Browser application for the first time, you will see a root node called

Browser in the left panel of the window, and discovered networks in the right panel of the window in

table format, as shown in Figure 5-1.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Figure 5-1 Netw ork Brow ser Main Window

When you click on the eye glass to the left of the Browser root node, the CWM application fetches all

available networks in the database and displays them in the left panel of the window. Network

information will be listed in table format in the right panel of the window. This table includes the

network number, network name, active or inactive status, and NW IP status.

Note

The NWIP flag is not applicable to PNNI nodes.

In Figure 5-2, Network 1 appears after clicking on the eye glass to the left of the Browser root node.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Figure 5-2 Netw ork Brow ser Root Node Expanded

The network elements contained in Network 1 appear after clicking on the eye glass to the left of

Network 1, as shown in Figure 5-3, where Routing Nodes and Routing Trunks are displayed.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Figure 5-3 Routing Nodes and Routing Trunks

Routing Nodes

Click on the eye glass to the left of Routing Nodes to display the corresponding network elements, as

shown in Figure 5-4.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Figure 5-4 Routing Nodes Expanded in Left Panel of Window

In Figure 5-5, the routing node called bpx3 has been selected, and its corresponding information appears

in the right panel of the window.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Figure 5-5 Routing Node Inform ation Displayed in Right Panel of Window

Status information for the selected routing node is indicated by the default Status tab at the bottom of

the Network Browser window, and includes the node number, node name, alarm status, management

status and synchronization status.

Click on the Version tab to display additional information about the selected routing node, including the

node number, node name, node type, revision and protocol.

Click on the Address tab to display additional information about the selected routing node, including

the node number, node name, LAN IP address and Network IP address.

Click on the All tab to display additional information on all of these categories in one screen.

Click on the eye glass to the left of the routing node to display the corresponding network elements, as

shown in Figure 5-6, where the bpx3 routing node has been selected and cards, feeder nodes, feeder

trunks and access nodes are displayed as network elements.

Note

CWM uses color to display alarm situations detected by the Network Browser.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Figure 5-6 Routing Node’s Network Elem ents

Cards

Click on the eye glass to the left of Cards and an expanded view of all cards for the selected routing node

will be displayed in the left panel of the window, as shown in Figure 5-7. When you select a card from

the left panel of the window, as shown in Figure 5-8, information about the card is displayed in the right

panel of the window in table format. The right panel displays information according to the selected tab

located at the bottom of the window: Type, Revision, Redundancy Info and All, as described shortly.

Use the horizontal scroll bar, located at the bottom of both panels, to view undisplayed columns.

Cards Table Type information is listed in Table 5-1.

Ta b le 5 - 1 C a rd s Ta bl e - Ty pe In fo rm a ti o n

Column Heading

Name

Meaning

Card format card:line:port

Logical card slot

Logical Slot

Alarm State

Card alarm status shown in text

and color

Active (green)

Standby (yellow)

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Table 5-1 Cards Table- Type Inform ation

Column Heading

Meaning

Back Card

Second Back Card

Figure 5-7 Cards for a Selected Node Displayed in the Left Panel

Select a card to display the corresponding information about the card in the right panel of the window,

as shown in Figure 5-8.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Figure 5-8 Inform ation for a Selected Card Displayed in the Right Panel

Type information for the selected card is indicated by the default Type tab located at the bottom of the

Network Browser window, and includes card slot and card name, logical slot, front card type, front card

state, front card reset reason, front card description, front card serial number, back card type, back card

state, back card description, back card serial number, second back card type, second back card state,

second back card description and second back card serial number.

Click on the Revision tab to display additional information about the selected card, including card slot

and card name, front card hardware revision, front card firmware revision, back card hardware revision,

back card firmware revision, second back card hardware revision and second back card firmware

revision.

Click on the Redundancy Info tab to display additional information about the selected card, including

card slot and card name, primary card type and slot, primary card status, secondary card type and slot,

secondary card status, covered slot and redundancy type.

Click on the All tab to display additional information on all of these categories in one screen.

Lines

Click on the eyeglass to the left of any of the listed cards to display lines; click on the eye glass to the

left of a listed line to display the corresponding information about the line in the right panel of the

window. Figure 5-9 shows a line for a selected card expanded in tree format in the left panel of the

window, and the corresponding information for the selected line displayed in table format in the right

panel of the window.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Figure 5-9

Line Inform ation

Configuration information for the selected line is indicated by the default Configuration tab located at

the bottom of the Network Browser window, and includes line number, admin state, interface, trunk,

virtual trunk and aps flag.

Click on the Status tab to display additional information about the selected line including line number,

interface and alarm status.

Click on the Misc tab to display additional information about the selected line including line number,

interface and miscellaneous comments.

Click on the All tab to display additional information on all of these categories in one screen.

Ports

Click on the eyeglass to the left of a selected line to display ports; click on the eye glass to the left of

Ports to display ports. Highlight a port and the corresponding information about the port will be

displayed in the right panel of the window. Figure 5-10 shows a port for a selected card on a BPX node

expanded in tree format in the left panel of the window, and the corresponding information for the

selected port presented in table format in the right panel of the window.

Note

Information displayed in the right panel of the Network Browser window for a selected port on a BPX

node is different from the information displayed for other types of nodes.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -1 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Figure 5-10 Port Inform ation

For BPX nodes, properties for the selected port is indicated by the default Properties tab located at the

bottom of the Network Browser window, and includes slot.port, admin state, port speed and whether the

port is XLMI enabled.

Click on the RscPrtn tab to display additional information about the selected port including the slot.port,

part ID, Ctlr type, egress and ingress guaranteed and maximum bandwidths, minimum and maximum vpi

and vci, minimum and maximum connections and channels, and ingress and egress percent bandwidth.

Click on the Status tab to display additional information about the selected port including slot.port and

port status.

Click on the Misc tab to display additional information about the selected port including slot.port and

miscellaneous comments.

Click on the All tab to display additional information on all of these categories in one screen.

For nodes other than BPX nodes, configuration information for the selected port is indicated by the

default Configuration tab located at the bottom of the Network Browser window, and includes

slot.line.port, admin state, guaranteed and maximum bandwidth, interface type, port SCT ID, SCT

version, VPI #, IF index, port speed, high speed, signal state, IMA port, line map, # of redundancy links,

maximum delay, IMA master, local and remote IMA ID, line order, IMA symmetry and XLMI

information.

Click on the RscPrtn tab to display additional information about the selected port including the

slot.line.port, ingress guaranteed and maximum bandwidth, minimum and maximum vpi and vci,

minimum connections, maximum connections, minimum channels, maximum channels, ingress and

egress percent bandwidth.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Click on the Status tab to display additional information about the selected port including slot.line.port

and port status.

Click on the Misc tab to display additional information about the selected port including slot.port and

miscellaneous comments.

Click on the All tab to display additional information on all of these categories in one screen.

To view information about other routing nodes in the network, click on the eye glass to the left of feeder

nodes, feeder trunks or access nodes to display the corresponding network elements; select an element

and the corresponding information will be displayed in the right panel of the window. Figure 5-11 shows

a selected feeder node in the left panel of the window, and its corresponding information in the right

panel of the window.

Figure 5-11 Feeder Nodes

Figure 5-12 shows network elements for the selected feeder node expanded in tree format in the left

panel of the window. Select a network element to display its corresponding information in the right panel

of the window.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -1 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Figure 5-12 Feeder Node’s Netw ork Elem ents

Figure 5-13 shows a selected feeder trunk in the left panel of the window, and its corresponding

information in the right panel of the window.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Figure 5-13 Feeder Trunks

Click on the eye glass to the left of Access Nodes and its network elements will be displayed in the left

panel of the window; select an element and the corresponding information will be displayed in the right

panel of the window.

Routing Trunks

Click on the eye glass to the left of Routing Trunks to see the corresponding network elements. In

Figure 5-14, bpx3.9.1 has been selected and the corresponding information appears in the right panel of

the window. The default window for routing trunks is indicated by the Status tab located at the bottom

of the Network Browser window and includes node.slot.port [vtrk.id] information, alarm status and

PNNI link status.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -1 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Figure 5-14 Routing Trunks- Status Inform ation

Click on the General tab to display additional information about the selected routing trunk including

interface type, line load, statistical reserve and protocol information, as shown in Figure 5-15.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Figure 5-15 Routing Trunks- General Inform ation

Click on the Line tab to display additional information about the selected routing trunk including local

and remote physical line numbers, as shown in Figure 5-16.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -1 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Figure 5-16 Routing Trunks- Line Inform ation

Click on the All tab to display additional information about all of these categories in one screen, as

shown in Figure 5-17.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Figure 5-17 Routing Trunks- All Inform ation Displayed

View Menu

The View menu, as shown in Figure 5-18, displays the Show Node, Set Fonts, Set Colors, and Refresh

All submenus.

Select the Show Node option to view a node by name and a window will appear asking for the name of

the node you want to view. Enter the node name and select OK. The node name will then be highlighted

in the left panel of the window and the corresponding details of the node will appear in the right panel

of the window.

Select Set Fonts or Set Colors to set how colors and fonts are displayed; the Refresh All option

refreshes your current display.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -1 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Filters

Figure 5-18 View Menu

Filters

Using the Network Browser Filter menu, you can define filters for nodes or trunks by first selecting a

node or trunk from the Routing Nodes or Routing Trunks display in the left panel of the Network

Browser. Select the Filter pull down menu from the Network Browser main menu bar, and select either

Node or Trunk to display filtering options. Only those resource(s) selected to filter are displayed in the

Network Browser main window.

Filter Menu

The Filter menu, as shown in Figure 5-19, displays the Node and Trunk filter submenus. Select Node

to filter by node name; select Trunk to filter by trunk name.

The Node option displays a window with a data field for the node name entry, and Protocol, Type and

Synchronized tabs containing additional submenu options. The Protocol submenu allows you to select

AR, TAG, PNNI, ILMI and/or Standalone options; the Type submenu allows you to select IGX, MGX,

BPX and/or IPX switches; the Synchronized submenu asks you to select Yes or No for synchronization.

Additional node and trunk information is listed in Table 5-2, Node and Trunk Table Information.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Filters

Figure 5-19 Filter Menu

Node Filter

Node filtering can be defined for any node element in your network, from routing nodes and routing

trunks, to individual card types, or node names beginning with a certain prefix. You can set up filters for

all nodes or specify one of the following types:

•

IGX 8400

BPX 8600

MGX 8850 (Stand-alone MGX 8850 nodes are displayed as a separate type)

Node filtering can be defined for all node types with AutoRoute (AR), TAG, PNNI, ILMI and

Standalone, or with all protocols, as shown in Figure 5-20.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -2 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Filters

Figure 5-20 Node Filter- Protocol

You can filter by type for all switches, all cards, certain cards, or certain interfaces, as shown in

Figure 5-21.

Figure 5-21 Node Filter- Type

Node synchronization can be set to Yes, No, or both, as shown in Figure 5-22.

Figure 5-22 Node Filter- Synchronized

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Filters

Trunk Filter

Figure 5-23 shows the trunk filter Alarm window with clear, minor and major alarm options.

Figure 5-23 Trunk Filter- Alarm

Trunk filtering can be defined for all trunk types, as shown in Figure 5-24, with AutoRoute (AR), TAG,

PNNI, ILMI and Standalone options.

Figure 5-24 Trunk Filter- Type

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -2 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Filters

Node and Trunk Tables

Table 5-2 Node and Trunk Table Inform ation

Node Column

Headings

Meaning

Node Name

Name of the node

Alarm Status

Node alarm status shown in text and

color:

Normal (green)

Minor (yellow)

Major (orange)

Critical (red)

Unreachable (gray)

Unknown (blue)

Management Status Management status of the node

(reachable or unreachable)

Synchronized

Yes/No synched. The node is

synchronized if it’s still synced up.

Revision

Switch software revision running on node

Network IP Address Network IP Address

LAN IP Address

LAN IP Address (not applicable to all

nodes)

Model/Type

Protocol

Model string (if available) or type of node

Protocols running on the node

Trunk Column

Headings

Meaning

Name

Trunk Endpoints of format

name:slot:port

Alarm Status

Trunk alarm status shown in text and

color

Normal (green)

Minor (yellow)

Major (orange)

Critical (red)

Unreachable (gray)

Unknown (blue)

Trunk Interface

Trunk Line Load

Statistics Parameter

AR or PNNI

Interface

Line Load

Stat Reserve

Protocol

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Filters

Note

CWM uses color to display alarm situations detected by the Network Browser.

Actions Menu

The Actions menu, as shown in Figure 5-25, displays the Cisco View submenu. To view card, line and

port configurations, select a card, line or port from the left panel of the Network Browser and then select

the Cisco View submenu. The WAN Cisco View is a JAVA-based device management software GUI

application that displays a graphical representation of the network device selected. Configuration and

performance information is also presented on the selected card, line or port, and Cisco View will also

perform minor configuration and troubleshooting tasks.

Figure 5-25 Actions Menu- Cisco View

XLMI

XLMI is a Cisco proprietary extension of the LMI protocol used to exchange IP addresses and to detect

those connections associated with a XPVC segment. XLMI is a special kind of trunk designed to link

AutoRoute Nodes and PNNI nodes. The following figures show XLMI links that are used in conjunction

with the CWM Network Browser.

Figure 5-26 through Figure 5-29 show the status of a link, remote end of a connection, or both.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -2 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Filters

Figure 5-26 XLMI Links- Status

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Filters

Figure 5-27 XLMI Links- Rem ote Inform ation

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -2 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Filters

Figure 5-28 XLMI Links- All

Figure 5-29 shows that XLMI is enabled. Notice that the farthest right columns of the ports display show

an ENNI Port Type, and Yes below the column labeled XLMI Enable.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Network Browser

Filters

Figure 5-29 XLMI Enabled

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

5 -2 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

Security Manager

Release 10 of CWM Security Manager (SM) is a new Java-based application that is launched from the

desktop. The Security Manager provides controlled access to multiple users of Cisco WAN Manager

(CWM), based on the user’s UNIX User ID and password.

Security Manager provides user-access profiles that can be customized for each user. The user-access

profile is a list of operations or actions a user can perform coupled with assigned access privileges for

each action. A user can be assigned access privileges to read, create (write), modify, and/or delete.

By default, only the svplus user can start and stop the CWM core processes. The svplus user has

sufficient access privileges to launch all CWM applications and administer the Security Manager

application.

Other users can be assigned access privileges that enable them to perform operations within

security-controlled applications. These operations can be limited depending on the setting of access

privileges by those who administer Security Management. Without the proper access privileges, users

cannot launch security-controlled applications.

Security Manager Requirements

To use CWM Security Manager application, you must first do two things:

•

Use the addnewuser as root, to add a new Unix userID and password.

Note

Each CWM Security Manager user must have a unique Unix userID separate from their

existing userID.

•

The new user can be added to the CWM Security system by svplus (or any other security

administrator), and access privileges assigned through the CWM Security Manager application.

To add a user, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

At the CWM console prompt, enter su and provide a password.

host% su

Password:

At the root prompt, enter the following:

# ./addnewuser <username>

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

6 -1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Security Manager

Launching Security Manager

where <username> is the name of the user to add.

Note

The # ./addnewuser <username> command must be issued from the /usr/users/svplus/tools directory.

Step 3

Add the user to CWM using CWM Security Manager as described in Creating New Profiles, page 6-7.

Launching Security Manager

The Security Manager application is launched from the CWM desktop by clicking on the Security

Manager icon, or by selecting Security Manager from the Apps pulldown on the menu bar of the CWM

Topology main window, as shown in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1 Accessing Security Manager

After the Security Manager application is launched, the New User window is displayed by default as

shown in Figure 6-2.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

6 -2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Security Manager

Launching Security Manager

Figure 6-2 New User w indow

Menu Options

The Security Manager application has four menu options: File, View, Help and About. Under the File

menu you will find the New menu, with User and Profile submenus. The User submenu takes you to the

Create New User tab; the Profile submenu takes you to the Create New Profile tab.

The Exit menu is the second menu option available under the File pulldown. When you select Exit, a

confirmation dialog box is displayed, giving you an opportunity to save the configuration with any

unsaved changes.

Four options are provided under the View menu, as shown in Figure 6-3,: Users, Profiles, Sort Users

and Sort Profiles. Selecting Users takes you to the View User window; selecting Profiles takes you to

the View Profile window. The Sort Users and Sort Profiles submenus bring up dialog boxes with users

or profiles sorted from A-L or M-Z.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

6 -3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Security Manager

Launching Security Manager

Figure 6-3 The View Menu Option

The Help menu helps you to select the appropriate privileges for a profile; the About menu shows you

the CWM Security Manager version release.

Button Options

The Security Manager main menu bar also provides the All Profiles button which displays the All

Profiles window, as shown in Figure 6-4, and the All Users button displays the All Users window, listing

those users who have Security Manager Admin privileges, as shown in Figure 6-5. The Refresh button

refreshes user data, as shown in Figure 6-6.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

6 -4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Security Manager

Launching Security Manager

Figure 6-4 All Profiles w indow

Note

When you install CWM software, two default access profiles are created: adminProf and userProf1.

Figure 6-5 All Users w indow

Note

When you install CWM software, three default users are created: svplus, secadmin, newuser.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

6 -5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Security Manager

Launching Security Manager

Figure 6-6 Refresh w indow

New User

To create a new user, complete the following steps:

Step 1

From the Security Manager window, select the New User tab as shown in Figure 6-2.

Select a profile from the drop-down combo box.

Step 2

Step 3

Click the Create button to create a new user.

Note

Only those users who have Create or All permissions can create new users.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

6 -6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Security Manager

Creating New Profiles

You can create profiles to allow users to perform specific tasks within CWM. For example, you can

create a profile to give a user read privilege for Network Topology or create and modify privileges for

Connection Manager.

You create profiles through the New Profile window of the Security Manager main window. When the

New Profile window is first displayed, as shown in Figure 6-7, boxes that are shown in bold typeface

are the only ones that can be selected.

Access Privileges

Security Management is provided at the application level. Users are granted access to controlled

applications depending on their access privileges.

Using the New Profile window, you can create a security profile to give a user read, create, modify, or

delete privileges to one or more of the controlled applications. You can set up a profile to grant all

privileges to one of the applications and some privileges to another application. You can create a profile

for users who only require read access to enable them to observe an application’s windows, and at the

same time provide detailed security control. Detailed information about which functions are available is

presented with the applications.

The functionality for access privileges depends on the application. Privileges are mapped to different

functions in different applications.

Table 6-1 lists the access privileges for CWM applications.

Table 6-1 Applications and Access Privileges

Function

Read

Create

Modify Delete

All

Connection Manager

Connections

Statistics Collection Manager

Configuration Save & Restore

Network Topology

Service Class Template Manager

Wingz

CWM Admin

Network Browser

Summary Reports

Security Manager Admin

Cisco View

Image Download

Node Resync

spvcPreferred Configurator

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

6 -7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Security Manager

Creating New Profiles

Note

Unless Network Topology has Read permissions, Config Save & Restore, Image Download, and Node

Resync cannot be selected. Also, if any of these three applications are selected in a profile, Network

Topology cannot be de-selected.

Read Privileges

With read privileges a user can view displays and topology windows, list connections, and other

functions where information is read. Read privileges are similar to the svplus-r account from earlier

releases of CWM.

Create Privileges

Modify Privileges

Delete Privileges

All Privileges

With create privileges, a user can create and configure connections, perform association backup, and add

nodes, ports, and trunks.

With modify privileges, a user is also granted read privileges. A user with modify access can modify

connections, ports, and trunks, and add and delete nodes and groups.

With delete privileges, a user is also granted read privileges. A user with delete access can delete

connections, ports, trunks, nodes and groups.

If granted all privileges, a user has read, create, modify and delete privileges for the associated

application.

New Profile

To create a new security profile, complete the following steps:

Note

Only users who have Create or All privileges for Security Manager can create a new profile.

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

From the Security Manager window, select the New Profile tab as shown in Figure 6-7.

Enter a Profile Name in the data field.

Select all desired access privileges and then click Create to create the new profile.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

6 -8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Security Manager

Creating New Profiles

Figure 6-7 New Profile w indow

View User

To view a user, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

From the Security Manager window, select the View User tab as shown in Figure 6-8.

Select the user you want to view from the list of users in the left panel of the window. The access

privileges for the selected user will be listed in the right panel of the window. All applications and their

access privileges are grayed out. Unchecked boxes indicate the absence of a particular privilege in a

specific application.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

6 -9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Security Manager

Creating New Profiles

Figure 6-8 View User w indow

View Profile

To view a profile, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

From the Security Manager window, select the View Profile tab as shown in Figure 6-9.

Select the profile you want to view from the list of profiles in the left panel of the window. The access

privileges for the selected profile will be listed in the right panel of the window. All applications and

their access privileges are grayed out. Unchecked boxes indicate the absence of a particular privilege in

a specific application.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

6 -1 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Security Manager

Creating New Profiles

Figure 6-9 View Profile Window

Modifying Users

To modify a user, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

From the Security Manager window, select the Modify User tab as shown in Figure 6-10.

Select the user to modify by selecting the appropriate User Name-Current Profile.

Select New Profile for the user, and then click Save.

Deleting Users

To delete a user, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

From the Security Manager window, select the Modify User tab as shown in Figure 6-10.

Select the user to delete by selecting the appropriate User Name-Current Profile, and then click Delete.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

6-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Security Manager

Creating New Profiles

Step 3

On the confirmation dialog, click Yes to delete the selected profile.

Figure 6-10 Modify User w indow

Modifying Profiles

After a profile has been created, you can easily modify it. To modify an existing profile, complete the

following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

From the Security Manager window, select the Modify Profile tab as shown in Figure 6-11.

Select the profile to modify by clicking on the profile name.

Select access privileges for the profile you want to modify from the Read, Create, Modify, Delete and

All privilege options, which are displayed in the right panel of the Modify Profile window.

Step 4

Step 5

Click Save to save modifications to the selected profile.

Click the Users with Profile button to list users with the modified profile.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

6 -1 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Security Manager

Controlled Applications

Deleting Profiles

To delete a profile, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

From the Security Manager window, select the Modify Profile tab as shown in Figure 6-11.

Select the profile to delete by clicking on the profile name, and then click Delete.

On the confirmation dialog, click Yes to delete the selected profile.

Figure 6-11 Modify Profile w indow

Controlled Applications

Security Manager is supported on CWM applications launched from the CWM desktop, from HP

OpenView, and from the UNIX command line prompt. The following tables list the CWM applications

and their supported access privileges. An “X” within an access privilege column indicates that the

privilege applies to the operation. If the column is blank, the access privilege does not apply to the

operation.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

6-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Security Manager

Controlled Applications

Table 6-2 lists the access privileges required for applications launched from the CWM desktop

Table 6-2 Desktop Application Security Matrix

Desktop Application

Network Topology

Image Download

Config Save & Restore

Security Manager

Wingz

Read

Create

Modify

Delete

All

Connection Manager GUI

Network Browser

CWM Administrator

Summary Reports

xpvc Preferred Configurator X

Table 6-3 lists the access privileges required for applications launched from the HP OpenView.

Table 6-3 HP OpenView Applications Security Matrix

HPOV Applications

SVOV Topology

Event Log

Read

Create

Modify

Delete

All

Image Download

Node Resync

Configuration Save

Configuration Restore

Table 6-4 lists the access privileges required for applications launched from the UNIX prompt.

Table 6-4 UNIX Prom pt Applications Security Matrix

UNIX Prompt Applications

Read

Create

Modify

Delete

All

Statistics Collection

Manager

Cisco View Lines/Trunks

Connection Proxy

Port Proxy

Connection Manager

Table 6-5 lists the access privileges required to perform security-controlled operations within the

Connections Manager application.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

6 -1 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Security Manager

Controlled Applications

Table 6-5 Connection Manager Access Privileges

Access Privilege Connection Manager Operations

Read

Able to list connections and view multicast connections and

templates

Create

Able to configure connections and perform association backup

Modify

Able to modify connections; also able to list connections, view

multicast connections and templates (read access privileges)

Delete

Able to delete connections; also able to list connections and view

multicast connections and templates (read access privileges)

Network Topology

The CWM Network Topology application is linked to Security Manager which checks a user’s access

privileges before providing access to the Topology application on the CWM desktop. A user without

access privileges will find the Topology icon on the CWM desktop to be grey, inactive, and unable to

launch the Topology application. Table 6-6 lists the access privileges.

Table 6-6 Topology Access Privileges

Access Privilege

Read

Topology Operations

Able to view topology windows.

Create

Able to add nodes and view topology windows (read access

privileges).

Modify

Delete

Able to make modifications to topology maps.

Able to delete nodes, delete groups, and view topology windows

(read access privileges).

Statistics Collection Manager

The CWM Statistics Collection Manager is linked to Security Manager which checks a user’s access

privileges before providing access to SCM. A user without access privileges will not be able to launch

the SCM application.

Table 6-7 lists the access privileges required to perform security-controlled operations within the SCM

application.

Table 6-7 SCM Access Privileges

Access Privilege

SCM Operation

Read

Enables Show Collection Information

option

Create

Modify

Delete

Enables Stats Enable option

Enables Start Collection option

Enables Stop Collection option

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

6-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Security Manager

Controlled Applications

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

6 -1 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

Service Class Template Manager

This chapter describes the CWM Service Class Template (SCT) desktop application. The SCT

application allows users to map standard connection protocol parameters for AXSM, AXSM-E, and

RPM cards using a set of data structures that associate VSI service types to sets of pre-configured Virtual

Channel (VC), and Class of Service Buffer (CoSB) parameters.

SCT Overview

The Service Class Template application is a Java based CWM process that allows for creating SCT files

which can then be loaded to nodes, and can be associated with interfaces on cards within the nodes. This

application is launched from the CWM desktop and allows users and network operators to configure

AXSM, AXSM-E, and RPM cards, using the Service Class Template feature. Specifically, users or

network operators are able to use the SCT application to create, modify, delete, download, and associate

SCT files to AXSM cards and ports.

VC Descriptor

The Virtual Channel Descriptor Template is a component of a Service Class Template that contains

platform specific VC configuration, and is indexed primarily by Service Type. A Service Type is a

concept for grouping connections that share a common set of traffic characteristics and QoS (Quality of

Service) requirements. The VC Descriptor Template defines SCT parameters that are applied to all VCs

and that match a specified Service Type. As defined in the SCT MIB for the AXSM card, a VC

Descriptor for AXSM consists of 36 elements, including the SCT ID, of which the VC Descriptor is a

part, the Service Type and the CoSB (Class of Service Buffer) number, which indicates the CoSB used

for the connections.

CoSB Descriptor

The Class of Service Buffer is a buffer or queue that serves connections with similar QoS requirements.

A CoSB Descriptor Template contains CoSB configurations, with 18 attributes for AXSM cards indexed

by CoSB number.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

SCT Load

The sctLoad utility included in CWM Release 10.5 is a tool designed for uploading SCT files that will

be used for provisioning. There are a number of pre-configured default files available, including SCT2,

SCT3, SCT4, and SCT5.

Note

SCT2 and SCT3 are used for PNNI, and SCT4 and SCT5 are used for MPLS; SCT2 and SCT4 are used

for policing, and SCT 3 and SCT 5 are used for no policing.

The following output informs the user that there are additional parameters which are not used for SCT2

and SCT3. This informative output appears when using sctLoad to load SCTs versions 2.0 and earlier

into a system which operates on SCTs for PXM 45, Release 2.1. The SCTs for PXM 45, Release 2.1

contain MPLS data which is not present in the earlier versions of SCTs. In this case, the sctLoad utility

informs the user that this data is missing and that it is inserting default data into the missing fields in

order to upgrade the SCT files to the latest SCT format. When SCT2 or SCT3 are uploaded, the sctLoad

utility will add default values to the missing fields, as shown in the example:

sjnms12% sctLoad -f AXSM_SCT.PORT.5

SCT VC data (12, 6) undefined, setting to default (1)

Exiting SctLoad ...

sjnms12% sctLoad -f AXSM_SCT.CARD.2

SCT VC data either undefined or missing due to old file format.

Setting missing data to default values...

Exiting SctLoad ...

Note

The sctLoad utility has successfully finished loading SCT file(s) when "Exiting SctLoad ... " appears at

the bottom of the output screen.

It is recommended that the user hits the Enter key after modifying any parameter values within an SCT

file.

Initializing SCT

When a PXM card is installed for the first time it does not have SCT files. Therefore, the user must

upload SCT 2, 3, 4 and 5 files from the switch to CWM via the sctLoad utility. The user will first need

to FTP the files from the switch to the directory ~svplus/sct-file/1, and then use the sctLoad utility to

load these files into the database.

Note

SctLoad passes SCT information to the CWM database. You can FTP the default SCT files from the

switch to the CWM workstation, and then use the SctLoad command to upload SCTs to CWM.

After they have been uploaded, the retrieved SCT files are displayed when you select the SCT tab which

is also the default tab of the Navigator panel. Figure 7-1 shows the SCT Main window.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Starting SCT

Figure 7-1 SCT Main w indow

Starting SCT

To start the SCT application, first start the CWM desktop from the CWM Main Menu, as described in

Chapter 2, “Starting and Stopping Cisco W A N Manager.” Select Application from the Menu bar, and

choose Service Class Template from the drop down menu.

Associate SCT File with Interface

The request covers both card and port association. PORT SCT is used for managing all traffic coming

to and leaving from the port, andCARD SCT is used for managing all traffic coming from and leaving

to the backplane of the MGX 8850.

Statistics are collected at different points during data transmission. Figure 7-2 shows how data travels

through two cards that are connected across the bus.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Starting SCT

Figure 7-2 Data Flow Through Tw o Cards Connected Across a Bus

Bus

UNI/NNI port card

Trunk card

Bus

ingress

Bus

egress

Egress

Ingress

Policing

Processing

Bus

egress

Bus

ingress

Egress

Processing

The ingress direction describes traffic that travels toward the bus. The egress direction describes traffic

that travels from the bus.

The numbers in Figure 7-2 correspond to the points at which statistics are collected. Points 1–7 show

data on the incoming path with policing. Points 8–13 show data on the return path without policing.

•

1—Data enters the UNI/NNI port card (ingress).

2—Data is queued (ingress).

3—Data is scheduled for admission onto the bus (ingress).

4—Data is queued for going onto the bus (ingress).

5—Data is queued for being taken off the bus (egress).

6—Data is processed on the trunk card (egress).

7—Data is queued for going out the trunk (egress).

8—Data enters the card from the trunk (ingress).

9—Data is scheduled for admission onto the bus (ingress).

10—Data is queued for going onto the bus (ingress).

11—Data is queued for being taken off the bus (egress).

12—Data is processed on the port card (egress).

13—Data is queued for going out the port (egress).

Note

The data flow process might vary depending on the card type.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Window Interaction

The main SCT window consists of the following:

Menu bar

Tool bar

•

Navigator panel

SCT tab

Node tab

Status bar

Button panel

Path label

Data panel

–

VC panel

CoSB panel

Functional Interaction

The SCT GUI allows the following functions to be performed in three different ways:

•

Selecting from the Options pull-down menu bar, or

Activating a button from the tool bar, or

Activating a button from the button panel.

Menu Bar

The Menu bar consists of File, View, and Help menus:

•

File menu options (some of the following options can also be found on the Tool bar and the Button

panel):

–

New SCT GUI: Allows an authorized user to create a new SCT GUI.

New SCT File: Allows an authorized user to create a new SCT file.

Save: The Save option allows an authorized user to modify and save a selected SCT file.

Save As: The Save As option allows an authorized user to create and save a new SCT file.

Delete: The Delete option allows an authorized user to delete a selected SCT file.

Download: The Download option allows an authorized user to load a selected SCT file.

Associate: The Associate option allows an authorized user to associate a selected SCT file.

Close: Allows an authorized user to close a selected SCT file.

Exit: Allows an authorized user to exit out of the SCT application.

•

View menu options:

Show SCT: Shows a selected SCT file.

–

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Functional Interaction

–

Show Node: Shows a selected SCT node.

Help menu options:

About SCT: This feature is not available at this time.

•

–

Tool Bar

The Tool bar contains shortcut buttons to the Button panel and some File menu options:

•

Save: The Save button allows an authorized user to modify and save a selected SCT file.

Save As: The Save As button allows an authorized user to create and save a new SCT file.

Delete: The Delete button allows an authorized user to delete a selected SCT file.

Reset: The Reset button allows an authorized user to cancel changes and reset data for a selected

SCT file.

•

Download: The Download button allows an authorized user to load a selected SCT file.

Associate: The Associate button allows an authorized user to associate a selected SCT file.

Navigator Panel

The Navigator panel consists of two tab-forms: the SCT tab and the Node tab. Each tab contains a Tree

view which allows data to be visually displayed in a hierarchical file format.

The SCT tab is the default tab of the Navigator panel. This tab allows an authorized user to view nodes

by SCT file. Nodes are displayed by expanding the SCT file node. Each SCT file can have more than one

node since each SCT file can be downloaded to more than one Network node. In addition, an SCT file

can also be associated by more than one Card node and more than one Port node.

The Node tab allows an authorized user to view SCT files by the Network node hierarchy. When

Network nodes are expanded, subnodes are displayed. A Network node includes SCT file node, Card

node, and Port node. If a subnode is a leaf node, then it does not have a reference and therefore can not

be expanded.

In addition, when a SCT file node is selected in the Navigator panel, the SCT file data will be displayed

in the Data panel. The Data panel displays VC and CoSB parameters which can be modified only if the

following conditions are met:

•

This SCT file is not downloaded and/or not associated with any AXSM card and /or port, and

The user has been assigned permissions.

Note

If the SCT file has been associated with a card and /or port and you want to edit the SCT, you must delete

the resource partition and down the port before associating the card and /or port to the new SCT ID. After

the card and/or port is associated to the new SCT ID, you can add the resource partitions again.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Functional Interaction

SCT Tab

The SCT tab is the default tab of the Navigator panel. In the SCT tab window, all SCT files are visually

displayed in a tree format. In the SCT tab, whenever a SCT file is selected, the SCT file data is displayed

in the Data Panel. If an SCT file node is not a leaf node, then it can be expanded to display Network

nodes, Card nodes, and Port nodes. This expansion cycle will be repeated for each subnode that is not a

leaf node:

•

If the SCT file node is a leaf node and can not be expanded, then the SCT file has been created, but

has not been downloaded to any Network node.

If the Network node is a leaf node and can not be expanded, then the SCT file has been downloaded

to a node, and has not been associated with any card or port of that Network node.

If the Card node is a leaf node and can not be expanded, then the SCT file has been downloaded to

the node and has been associated with the Card node. However, it has not been associated with any

ports of that Card node.

Node Tab

In the Node tab, nodes are also displayed in a tree format. Network nodes can be expanded to view Card

nodes, Port nodes, and SCT file nodes. If the Card node is not a leaf node, then it can be expanded to

view the associated SCT file and its ports. The same also applies to a Port node. That is if the Port node

is not a leaf node, then it can also be expanded to view the associated SCT file node.

As with the SCT Navigator view, whenever the SCT file node is selected, the SCT file data is displayed

in the Data Panel.

Note that since the SCT GUI application applies only to AXSM cards, the Node view only displays

AXSM cards of a Network node.

Status Bar

The Status bar is simply a label which displays the status information of the request. For example, if the

modify request can not be completed because of a lock, the status bar will display the relevant error

message.

Button Panel

The Button panel contains the following options: Save, Save As, Delete, Reset, Download, and

Associate. (These options can also be found on the Tool bar and under the File menu options dropdown.)

Buttons are enabled or disabled by the following matrix:

Table 7-1

Buttons Enable Matrix

State/Button

Save

Save As

Disable

Enable

Delete

Disable

Enable

Download

Disable

Enable

Associate

Disable

Read Only

Disable

Create State (Not Enable

Load)

Load State

Disable

Enable

Disable

Enable

Associated State

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Functional Interaction

The logical sequence of loading and associating SCT files is as follows:

Create(Save As)->Modify(Save)->Load(Download)->Associate

Save As

The Save As button allows an authorized user to create and save a new SCT file:

Step 1

Step 2

Create an SCT file by selecting New SCT File from the File dropdown menu on the main menu bar.

Check that all Service Type tables, the CoSB table on the VC panel, and all CoSB parameters on the

CoSB panel are clear.

Step 3

Step 4

Select the Save As button from the button panel, or select Save As from the File dropdown menu.

Name the new SCT file.

Note

Newly created SCT files start at ID 100 and increment by 1 regardless of whether it is a card or port file.

Save

The Save button allows an authorized user to modify and save a selected SCT file. Selecting an SCT file

from the SCT tab, or Node tab, will display the SCT parameters in the Main panel. If the user does not

have permissions, or if the SCT file is associated, then the displaying parameters will not be modifiable.

After editing parameters, press the Save button to save the new changes.

Delete

Reset

The Delete button allows an authorized user to delete a selected SCT file. The user can delete an SCT

file only if it is not loaded and not associated. To delete an SCT file, select the appropriate SCT file and

then press the Delete button.

The Reset button allows an authorized user to cancel changes and reset data for a selected SCT file.

Download

Associate

The Download button allows an authorized user to load a selected SCT file. Load an SCT file by

selecting one from the SCT tab panel and pressing the Download button. This will prompt the user for

the Node name. Once the Node ID is entered, the user selects OK to load the SCT file into the specified

node.

The Associate button allows an authorized user to associate a selected SCT file if it has been loaded into

a node. A loaded SCT file is identified by the fact that it has a leaf node on the SCT tree. Under the Node

tree view, if an SCT file is a leaf node of a node, then the SCT file is loaded into that node. To associate

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Functional Interaction

an SCT file, select the appropriate SCT file from the Tree panel and then press the Associate button. The

system will prompt you for a Port or Card ID. After entering the ID, press the OK button to associate

the SCT file.

SCT Deletion

The SCT manager only allows the deletion of a non-downloaded SCT file. If the SCT file has been

downloaded to the switch or node, it can only be removed or deleted using the "delsct" CLI command.

Path Label

Data Panel

The Path label gives the location of the selected SCT Card or Port file.

The Data panel displays the SCT data of associated VC parameters and CoSB parameters. These

parameters are displayed in two sub-panels: a VC panel and a CoSB panel. The VC panel contains both

VC parameters and CoSB parameters in a table format. The CoSB panel displays only CoSB parameters.

VC Panel

The VC panel is organized into a series of tab panes. Each tab represents a group of VC parameters

which categorically belong to that group. In addition, there are two tabs of which one displays all VC

parameters and the other displays all CoSB parameters. Currently, there are a total of eight tabs, and each

tab represents a group as follows:

Policy: Displays information related to management priorities for network traffic

•

Service Type: The service type (i.e. CBR, VBR, ABR) to which the parameters apply.

Service Category: The service category to which the service type belongs. All service types that

belong to the same service category should be mapped to the same Class of Service Buffer. Access:

read only. Values: 0-65535.

•

Cosb Number: The Class of Service Buffer number associated with the service type. Access:

read-write. Values: 1-16.

CAC Treatment: Connection Admission Control. The CAC algorithms that are supported are: 1)

lcnCac, 2) eCac-Model A, 3) eCac-Model B, 4) eCac-Model C, 5) eCac-Model D, 6) eCac-Model

E, 7) eCac-Model F, 8) mbBwCac. DEFVAL {2}. Access: read-write. Values: 1-256.

•

UPC Enable: When a connection is added, a VPI.VCI address is assigned, and UPC parameters are

configured for the connection. For each cell in an ATM stream, the VPI.VCI addresses are verified

and each cell is checked for compliance with UPC parameters.

UPC CLP: Usage Parameter Control- Cell Loss Priority Select. Disable GCRAs and GCRA #2 with

Packet Policing Action are used for policing packet or frame traffic. GCRA1-ENB: Enables GCRA1

only. GCRA 1&2: Enables you to turn on policing for one or both GCRA1 & GCRA2.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Functional Interaction

•

GCRA-1: Indicates the handling of cells that fail the first (PCR) bucket of the policer. If object

UPC_ENABLE is set to disable the policing, then this object is not used. Options for this feature

include: 1- Discard, 2- Set CLP bit, 3- Set CLP of untagged cells, discard tagged cells.

GCRA-2: Indicates the handling of cells that fail the second (PCR) bucket of the policer. If object

UPC_ENABLE is set to disable the policing, then this object is not used. Options for this feature

include: 1- Discard, 2- Set CLP bit, 3- Set CLP of untagged cells, discard tagged cells.

Conn Parm: Displays information related to connection types, services and categories

•

Service Type: The service type (i.e. CBR, VBR, ABR) to which the parameters apply.

Service Category: The service category to which the service type belongs. All service types that

belong to the same service category should be mapped to the same Class of Service Buffer. Access:

read only. Values: 0-65535.

•

Peak Cell Rate (PCR): The peak (maximum) cell rate for a connection using this service type. This

value is a percentage of the maximum cell rate for the logical interface. 1000000 is equal to 100%.

Range and Units: 0-1000000.

•

Sustained Cell Rate (SCR): The sustained cell rate for a connection using this service type. This

value is a percentage of the PCR. 1000000 is equal to 100%. Range and Units: 0-1000000.

Min Cell Rate (MCR): The minimum cell rate for a connection using this service type. This value

is a percentage of the PCR. 1000000 is equal to 100%. Range and Units: 0-1000000.

ICR: Initial Cell Rate. The cell rate used to begin a transmission on a connection that has been idle

for a configured period of time. This value is a percentage of the PCR for the logical interface.

1000000 is equal to 100%. (Used only on ABR service type connections.) Range and Units:

0-1000000.

•

MBS: Max Burst Size. The maximum number of cells that may arrive at a rate equal to the PCR.

Used for policing. Range and Units: 1-500000.

•

MFS: Max Frame Size. The maximum AAL5 frame size in cells.

CDVT: Cell Delay Variation Tolerance for the first leaky bucket.

Packet Discard Mode: Enables or disables Packet Discard Mode on the connection. Range and units:

1=enabled; 2=disabled.

VC Threshold: Displays information related to the Virtual Channel Threshold

•

Service Type: The service type (i.e. CBR, VBR, ABR) to which the parameters apply.

Service Category: The service category to which the service type belongs. All service types that

belong to the same service category should be mapped to the same Class of Service Buffer. Access:

read only. Values: 0-65535.

•

Maximum Threshold: The VcMax Threshold for CLP (0+1) cells in microseconds. Range and units:

0-5000000 microseconds.

CLP (1) High Threshold: Cell Loss Priority High Threshold (% of VC QMax) is the highest

threshold for the bit in the header of an ATM cell that identifies the cell as eligible for discard within

the network under predefined congestion conditions. Most often set by the ingress policing function.

•

CLP-LOW/EPD1: CLP (1) Low or EPDs (1): Cell Loss Priority Low Threshold (% of VC QMax)/

Early Packet Discard. If AAL5 FBTC = yes, then for the BXM card this is the EPD threshold setting.

EPDs is the lowest threshold for the bit in the header of an ATM cell that identifies the cell as eligible

for discard within the network under predefined congestion conditions.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -1 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Functional Interaction

•

EPD0: Early Packet Discard Threshold. The maximum threshold for CLP (0+1) cells. This value is

a percentage of the MAX_CELL THRESH for the connection. 1000000 is equal to 100%. Range

and value: 0-1000000.

EFCI Threshold: Explicit Forward Congestion Indication. The VC EFCI discard threshold. This

value is a percentage of MAX_CELL THRESH. 1000000 is equal to m100%. Range and values:

0-1000000.

Scaling: Displays information related to Service Scaling

•

Service Type: The service type (i.e. CBR, VBR, ABR) to which the parameters apply.

Service Category: The service category to which the service type belongs. All service types that

belong to the same service category should be mapped to the same Class of Service Buffer. Access:

read only. Values: 0-65535.

•

COS Scaling: Class of Service Scaling: Class of Service Scaling provides a means of scaling through

a set of extended parameters, which are generally platform specific, based on a set of standard ATM

parameters passed to the VSI slave during connection set up.

•

Interface Scaling: Allows the scaling and exchange of information between connections.

ABR: Displays information related to the ABR Service Type

•

Service Type: ABR (Available Bit Rate) service type and parameters.

Service Category: The service category to which the service type belongs. All service types that

belong to the same service category should be mapped to the same Class of Service Buffer. Access:

read only. Values: 0-65535.

•

CI Control: Congestion Indicator is a field in an RM-cell used to cause the source to decrease its

ACR (Allowed Cell Rate). The source sets CI =0 when it sends an RM cell. C=1indicats EFCI has

been received on a previous data cell.

•

Cut-Off RM Cells: Allows for variations in the RM-cell.

VSVD: Virtual Source/ Virtual Destination. A VSVD is an ABR connection which may be divided

into two or more separately controlled ABR segments. Each ABR control segment, except the first,

is sourced by a virtual source. Sources and destinations are linked via bi-directional connections,

and each connection termination point is both a source and a destination, a source for data that is

transmitting, and a destination for data that is receiving.

•

ADTF: Allowed-cell-rate Decrease Time Factor/Initial-cell-rate Time-out. The time between RM

cells before the allowable cell rate returns to the initial cell rate.

RDF: Rate Decrease Factor: An ABR service parameter that controls the decrease in cell

transmission rate.

RIF: Rate Increase Factor. A percentage increase in the allowable cell rate for an ABR connection

if the BRM cells do not have the N1 or C1 bits set.

NRM: Number RM. The maximum number of data cells that can be sent before sending an RM cell

on an ABR connection.

TRM: Time RM/Minimal Adjustment Period. The maximum amount of time between RM cells on

an ABR connection.

CDF: Cutoff Decrease Factor. CDF controls the decrease in ACR (Allowed Cell rate), which is an

ABR service parameter, associated with CRM (Cell Rate Margin), which is a measure of the

difference between the effective bandwidth allocation and the allocation for sustainable rate in cells

per second.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Functional Interaction

•

TBE: Transient Buffer Exposure. The number of RM cells that can be sent out by a virtual source

before waiting for a BRM cell in return.

FRTT: FRTT(millisec): Fixed Round-Trip Time. The amount of delay expected for an RM cell to

travel through the network to the destination and back again.

WFQ: Displays information related to Weighted Fair Queuing

•

Service Type: The service type (i.e. CBR, VBR, ABR) to which the parameters apply.

Service Category: The service category to which the service type belongs. All service types that

belong to the same service category should be mapped to the same Class of Service Buffer. Access:

read only. Values: 0-65535.

•

WFQ: Weighted Fair Queuing. WFQ queues traffic in separate queues, according to traffic class

definition, guaranteeing each queue some portion of the total available bandwidth. WFQ recognizes

when a particular queue is not fully utilizing its allocated bandwidth and portions that capacity out

to the other queues on a proportionate basis. This is done by portioning out available bandwidth on

the basis of individual information flows according to their message parameters.

All VC: Displays information related to All VC

•

Service Type: The service type (i.e. CBR, VBR, ABR) to which the parameters apply.

Service Category: The service category to which the service type belongs. All service types that

belong to the same service category should be mapped to the same Class of Service Buffer. Access:

read only. Values: 0-65535.

•

CoSB No: Class of Service Buffer Number. The number that identifies one of the sixteen Cosb

buffers. A Cosb buffer is a buffer that services connections with similar QoS requirements. Range

and units:1-16.

CAC Treatment: Connection Admission Control. The CAC algorithms that are supported are: 1)

lcnCac, 2) eCac-Model A, 3) eCac-Model B, 4) eCac-Model C, 5) eCac-Model D, 6) eCac-Model

E, 7) eCac-Model F, 8) mbBwCac. DEFVAL {2}. Access: read-write. Values: 1-256.

UPC Enable: When a connection is added, a VPI.VCI address is assigned, and UPC parameters are

configured for the connection. For each cell in an ATM stream, the VPI.VCI addresses are verified

and each cell is checked for compliance with UPC parameters.

UPC CLP: Usage Parameter Control- Cell Loss Priority Select. Enables or disables GCRA policing

functions on the connection. GCRA1-ENB: Enables GCRA1 only. GCRA 1&2: Enables both

GCRA1 & GCRA2. Options for this feature include: 1- Bk 1: CLP (0+1); Bk 2: CLP (0), 2- Bk 1:

CLP (0+1); Bk 2: CLP (0+1), 3- Bk 1: CLP (0+1); Bk 2: Disabled, 4- Bk 1: CLP (0+1) with MFS.

•

GCRA-1: Indicates the handling of cells that fail the first (PCR) bucket of the policer. If object

UPC_ENABLE is set to disable the policing, then this object is not used. Options for this feature

include: 1- Discard, 2- Set CLP bit, 3- Set CLP of untagged cells, discard tagged cells.

GCRA-2: Indicates the handling of cells that fail the second (PCR) bucket of the policer. If object

UPC_ENABLE is set to disable the policing, then this object is not used. Options for this feature

include: 1- Discard, 2- Set CLP bit, 3- Set CLP of untagged cells, discard tagged cells.

PCR: The peak (maximum) cell rate for a connection using this service type. This value is a

percentage of the maximum cell rate for the logical interface. 1000000 is equal to 100%. Range and

Units: 0-1000000.

SCR: The sustained cell rate for a connection using this service type. This value is a percentage of

the PCR. 1000000 is equal to 100%. Range and Units: 0-1000000.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -1 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Functional Interaction

•

MCR: The minimum cell rate for a connection using this service type. This value is a percentage of

the PCR. 1000000 is equal to 100%. Range and Units: 0-1000000.

ICR: Initial Cell Rate. The cell rate used to begin a transmission on a connection that has been idle

for a configured period of time. This value is a percentage of the PCR for the logical interface.

1000000 is equal to 100%. (Used only on ABR service type connections.) Range and Units:

0-1000000.

•

MBS: The maximum number of cells that may arrive at a rate equal to the PCR. Used for policing.

Range and Units: 1-500000.

•

MFS: Max Frame Size. The maximum AAL5 frame size in cells.

CDVT: Cell Delay Variation Tolerance for the first leaky bucket.

Packet Discard Mode: Enables or disables Packet Discard Mode on the connection. Range and units:

1=enabled; 2=disabled.

•

Maximum Threshold: The VcMax Threshold for CLP (0+1) cells in microseconds. Range and units:

0-5000000 microseconds.

CLP-HIGH: Cell Loss Priority High Threshold (% of VC QMax) is the highest threshold for the bit

in the header of an ATM cell that identifies the cell as eligible for discard within the network under

predefined congestion conditions. Most often set by the ingress policing function. Range and values:

0-1000000.

•

CLP-LOW/EPD1: CLP (1) Low or EPDs (1): Cell Loss Priority Low Threshold (% of VC QMax)/

Early Packet Discard. If AAL5 FBTC = yes, then for the BXM card this is the EPD threshold setting.

EPDs is the lowest threshold for the bit in the header of an ATM cell that identifies the cell as eligible

for discard within the network under predefined congestion conditions.

EPD0: Early Packet Discard Threshold. The maximum threshold for CLP (0+1) cells. This value is

a percentage of the MAX_CELL THRESH for the connection. 1000000 is equal to 100%. Range

and value: 0-1000000.

•

EFCI: Explicit Forward Congestion Indication. The VC EFCI discard threshold. This value is a

percentage of MAX_CELL THRESH. 1000000 is equal to m100%. Range and values: 0-1000000.

CoS Scaling: Class of Service Scaling provides a means of scaling through a set of extended

parameters, which are generally platform specific, based on a set of standard ATM parameters

passed to the VSI slave during connection set up.

•

Interface Scaling: Allows the scaling and exchange of information between connections.

CI Control: Congestion Indicator is a field in an RM-cell used to cause the source to decrease its

ACR (Allowed Cell Rate). The source sets CI =0 when it sends an RM cell. C=1indicats EFCI has

been received on a previous data cell.

•

Cut-Off RM Cells: Allows for variations in the RM-cell.

VSVD: Virtual Source/ Virtual Destination. A VSVD is an ABR connection which may be divided

into two or more separately controlled ABR segments. Each ABR control segment, except the first,

is sourced by a virtual source. Sources and destinations are linked via bi-directional connections,

and each connection termination point is both a source and a destination, a source for data that is

transmitting, and a destination for data that is receiving.

•

ADTF: Allowed-cell-rate Decrease Time Factor/Initial-cell-rate Time-out. The time between RM

cells before the allowable cell rate returns to the initial cell rate.

RDF: Rate Decrease Factor: An ABR service parameter that controls the decrease in cell

transmission rate.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Functional Interaction

•

RIF: Rate Increase Factor. A percentage increase in the allowable cell rate for an ABR connection

if the BRM cells do not have the N1 or C1 bits set.

NRM: Number RM. The maximum number of data cells that can be sent before sending an RM cell

on an ABR connection.

TRM: Time RM/Minimal Adjustment Period. The maximum amount of time between RM cells on

an ABR connection.

CDF: Cutoff Decrease Factor. CDF controls the decrease in ACR (Allowed Cell rate), which is an

ABR service parameter, associated with CRM (Cell Rate Margin), which is a measure of the

difference between the effective bandwidth allocation and the allocation for sustainable rate in cells

per second.

•

TBE:Transient Buffer Exposure. The number of RM cells that can be sent out by a virtual source

before waiting for a BRM cell in return.

FRTT: Fixed Round-Trip Time. The amount of delay expected for an RM cell to travel through the

network to the destination and back again.

WFQ: Weighted Fair Queuing is an approximation of the Generalized Processor Sharing (GPS)

scheduling. WFQ can be generally used to give performance guarantees to connections carrying

best-effort packet traffic, where each connection can be guaranteed bandwidth in proportion to its

weight and in a fair manner.

All CoSB: Presents all CoSB information within the VC panel display

•

CoSB No: Class of Service Buffer Number. The number that identifies one of the sixteen Cosb

buffers. A Cosb buffer is a buffer that services connections with similar QoS requirements. Range

and units:1-16.

•

Minimum Rate: Min Cell Rate (MCR): Set to default value. This field is not editable.

Maximum Rate: Peak Cell Rate (PCR). Set to default value. This field is not editable.

Minimum Priority: The priority at which this COSB will be serviced to guarantee it minimum and

maximum bandwidth requirements. Highest priority = 0; Lowest priority = 15. Range and units:

0-15.

•

Excess Priority: The priority at which this COSB will be given access to excess bandwidth. Highest

priority = 0; Lowest priority = 15. Range and units: 0-15.

Maximum Threshold:The VcMax Threshold for CLP (0+1) cells in microseconds. Range and units:

0-5000000 microseconds.

CLP-HIGH: Cell Loss Priority High Threshold (% of VC QMax) is the highest threshold for the bit

in the header of an ATM cell that identifies the cell as eligible for discard within the network under

predefined congestion conditions. Most often set by the ingress policing function. Range and values:

0-1000000.

•

CLP-LOW/EPD1: CLP (1) Low or EPDs (1): Cell Loss Priority Low Threshold (% of VC QMax)/

Early Packet Discard. If AAL5 FBTC = yes, then for the BXM card this is the EPD threshold setting.

EPDs is the lowest threshold for the bit in the header of an ATM cell that identifies the cell as eligible

for discard within the network under predefined congestion conditions.

•

EPD0 Threshold: Early Packet Discard Threshold. The maximum threshold for CLP (0+1) cells.

This value is a percentage of the MAX_CELL THRESH for the connection. 1000000 is equal to

100%. Range and value: 0-1000000.

EFCI Threshold: Explicit Forward Congestion Indication. The VC EFCI discard threshold. This

value is a percentage of MAX_CELL THRESH. 1000000 is equal to m100%. Range and values:

0-1000000.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -1 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Functional Interaction

•

Explicit Rate Sampling: Indicates whether Explicit Rate Sampling (ERS) is enabled or disabled.

Range and units: 1=enabled; 2=disabled.

Random Early Discard Selection(RED): RED will drop packets from queues on a random basis in

order to avoid buffer overflow. RED is accomplished by dropping packets on a random basis, which

is determined statistically, when the mean queue depth exceeds a threshold over a period of time,

effectively advising the packet source router to decrease its packet rate.

•

RED Threshold: Random Early Discard Threshold: The threshold at which the COSB Random Early

Discard (RED) is activated. This threshold is a percentage of the MAX_CELL THRESH for the

connection. 1000000 is equal to 100%. Range and units: 0-1000000.

•

RED Probability: Random Early Discard Probability Factor: The mantissa value of probability for

maximum discard when RED is activated. Determined as 1/2^<value>.

WFQ: Weighted Fair Queuing. WFQ queues traffic in separate queues, according to traffic class

definition, guaranteeing each queue some portion of the total available bandwidth. WFQ recognizes

when a particular queue is not fully utilizing its allocated bandwidth and portions that capacity out

to the other queues on a proportionate basis. This is done by portioning out available bandwidth on

the basis of individual information flows according to their message parameters.

•

Best Effort: A Quality of Service Class in which no specific traffic parameters and no absolute

guarantees are provided. Best Effort includes UBR and ABR Service Types.

Discard Alarm Enable: Indicates whether Discard Alarm has been enabled or disabled. Range and

units: 1=enabled; 2=disabled.

•

Discard Alarm Threshold: Indicates the Discard Alarm Threshold.

Cell Loss Ratio: A negotiated Quality of Service parameter in an ATM network. This parameter

indicates a ratio of lost cells to total transmitted cells.

Each tab displays parameters in table format, with the above criteria and its associated data presented in

each column of a given table. Each row represents a unique Service Type, including: ABR, CBR, UBR,

VBR and VSI Signal.

By selecting a row on the table, the corresponding CoSB parameters are also displayed in the bottom

CoSB panel.

Except for Service Type and Service Category columns, most columns under each VC tab have drop

down boxes which allow authorized users to edit and modify cells as needed.

Cells are editable and can be changed ONLY if both of the following conditions are met:

•

The user has security permissions to configure SCT files, and

The SCT file is not downloaded and/or not associated

CoSB Panel

The CoSB panel displays CoSB parameters by CoSB Number. The data in this panel reflects the row

selection of the table on the VC or top panel. These parameters are currently organized into three groups:

Rate & Priority, Threshold, and Miscellaneous.

In the Rate & Priority category, the following parameters can be modified:

•

Minimum Rate: The minimum rate at which this COSB will be serviced in order to guarantee its

minimum and maximum bandwidth requirements.

•

Maximum Rate: The minimum rate at which this COSB will be serviced in order to guarantee its

minimum and maximum bandwidth requirements.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Functional Interaction

•

Minimum Priority: The priority at which this COSB will be serviced to guarantee its minimum and

maximum bandwidth requirements. Highest priority = 0; Lowest priority = 15. Range and units:

0-15.

Excess Priority: The priority at which this COSB will be given access to excess bandwidth. Highest

priority = 0; Lowest priority = 15. Range and units: 0-15.

In the Threshold category, the following parameters can be modified:

•

Maximum: Maximum Threshold.

CLP High: Cell Loss Priority High Threshold (% of VC QMax) is the highest threshold for the bit

in the header of an ATM cell that identifies the cell as eligible for discard within the network under

predefined congestion conditions. Most often set by the ingress policing function.

•

CLP Low: Cell Loss Priority Low Threshold (% of VC QMax) is the lowest threshold for the bit in

the header of an ATM cell that identifies the cell as eligible for discard within the network under

predefined congestion conditions.

EPD0: Early Packet Discard Threshold. The maximum threshold for CLP (0+1) cells. This value is

a percentage of the MAX_CELL THRESH for the connection. 1000000 is equal to 100%. Range

and value: 0-1000000.

EFCI Threshold: Explicit Forward Congestion Indication. The VC EFCI discard threshold. This

value is a percentage of MAX_CELL THRESH. 1000000 is equal to m100%. Range and values:

0-1000000.

RED: Random Early Discard. The threshold at which the COSB Random Early Discard (RED) is

activated. This threshold is a percentage of the MAX_CELL THRESH for the connection. 1000000

is equal to 100%. Range and units: 0-1000000.

Dscd Alm Th: Indicates the Discard Alarm Threshold.

In the Miscellaneous category, the following parameters can be modified:

•

RED Pro Factor: Random Early Discard Probability Factor. The mantissa value of probability for

maximum discard when RED is activated. Determined as 1/2^<value>.

•

RED Selection: Random Early Discard will drop packets from queues on a random basis in order to

avoid buffer overflow. RED is accomplished by dropping packets on a random basis, which is

determined statistically, when the mean queue depth exceeds a threshold over a period of time,

effectively advising the packet source router to decrease its packet rate.

•

WFQ: Weighted Fair Queuing is an approximation of the Generalized Processor Sharing (GPS)

scheduling. WFQ can be generally used to give performance guarantees to connections carrying

best-effort packet traffic, where each connection can be guaranteed bandwidth in proportion to its

weight and in a fair manner.

•

ERS: Explicit Rate Stamping. Indicates whether Explicit Rate Stamping (ERS) is enabled or

disabled. Range and units: 1=enabled; 2=disabled.

Best Effort: A Quality of Service Class in which no specific traffic parameters and no absolute

guarantees are provided. Best Effort includes UBR and ABR Service Types.

Dscrd Alarm: Enable/disable Discard Alarm per VC: Indicates whether Discard Alarm has been

enabled or disabled. Range and units: 1=enabled; 2=disabled.

CLR- Cell Loss Ratio. CLR is a negotiated QoS (Quality of Service) parameter and acceptable

values are network specific. The objective is to minimize CLR provided the end-system adapts the

traffic to the changing ATM layer transfer characteristics. The CLR is defined for a connection as

Lost Cells/Total Transmitted Cells.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -1 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Creating a New Service Class Template

If you select a different CoSB number by selecting another row from the table of the top panel, the data

on this panel will simultaneously change to reflect your selection.

In addition, when you move from one tab to the next, the data on this panel will simultaneously change

if the CoSB number has also been changed.

As with the VC parameters, the CoSB parameters can also be changed only if both of the following

conditions are met:

•

The user has security permissions to configure SCT files, and

The SCT file is not downloaded and/or not associated.

Creating a New Service Class Template

Service Class Templates can only be modified or created using the Cisco WAN Manager (CWM). The

following explains how to use CWM to create your own SCTs.

Caution

Only network engineers who are extremely knowledgeable about ATM and its parameters should create

and use their own SCTs.

Creating a new SCT involves configuring the ATM parameters for specific classes of service to suit the

special needs of your customers. For example, if you have customers with special policing or

nonpolicing requirements, you can create an SCT to meet those specifications.

Some service providers offer different levels of service (such as gold, silver, or bronze) at different

prices. Each level of service offers a different class of service and is supported by a different SCT.

Launching the Service Class Template Manager

The Service Class Template Manager can be launched from the toolbar by clicking on the Service Class

Template Manager icon as shown in Figure 7-3.

Figure 7-3 Close-up of Service Class Tem plate Manager icon

Figure 7-4 shows the CWM Apps Menu View. The Service Class Template Manager can also be

launched from the Apps menu by clicking on Apps and selecting Service Class Template Manager.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Navigating the Service Class Template Manager

Figure 7-4 CWM Apps Menu view

Navigating the Service Class Template Manager

Figure 7-5 shows the Service Class Template Manager. In the left column, under SCT File, the SCTs

that are available on the card are listed. This view shows two SCTs:

•

PORT : AXSM_EGR0[0]

CARD : AXSM_ING[0]

The PORT SCT is used for managing all the traffic that is entering into and leaving from the port, while

the CARD SCT is used for managing all the traffic entering into and leaving the backplane of the MGX

8850.

PORT : AXSM_EGR0[0] is highlighted.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -1 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Navigating the Service Class Template Manager

Figure 7-5 Service Class Tem plate Manager w ith Policy selected

SCT parameters can be added or changed using either the SCT Tables or the SCT Entry Fields.

SCT Tables

The SCT Tables are the white rows and columns that appear in the upper half of the SCT Manager

Window. To display different parameter tables, select one of the other tabs, such as Conn Parm or VC

Threshold. For example, Figure 7-6 shows the Service Class Template Manager with the VC Threshold

tab selected.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Changing SCT Parameters

Figure 7-6 Service Class Tem plate Manager w ith VC Threshold Selected

Entry Fields

The Entry Fields appear in the gray, lower half of the SCT Manager Window. When you select a Service

Type in the SCT Table, the name of the Service Type appears over the Entry Fields section and the CosB

parameters for that Service Type appear in the Entry Fields.

Changing SCT Parameters

SCT Parameters can be modified using either a table or an entry field. The SCT tables contain all

parameters, while the entry fields display only the most frequently accessed parameters.

Using the SCT Tables

To change an SCT parameter using the SCT Tables, select and highlight the field of the parameter you

want to change by double-clicking on it. Once the field is selected you can either type a new number into

the field or select a new value from a pull-down menu. Most fields have pull-down menus, but some

require that the new value be typed.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -2 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Changing SCT Parameters

The SCT Tables are the white rows and columns that appear in the upper half of the SCT Manager

Window. The rows are the service types, and the columns are the parameters. Different parameter tables

are displayed by selecting one of the different table tabs. The table tabs run horizontally through the

middle of the SCT Manager. Figure 7-7 shows a chosen service category field with the Policy tab

selected.

Figure 7-7 SCT Manager w ith a Service Category Field selected

Figure 7-8 shows the SCT Manager with the CAC Treatment field for RT VBR.1 selected and the

pull-down menu displayed. To change this value, select a different value from the pull-down menu.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Changing SCT Parameters

Figure 7-8 SCT Manager w ith CAC Treatm ent field selected

Using the Entry Fields

When you select a Service Type in the SCT Table, the name of the Service Type appears over the Entry

Fields section and the CosB parameters for that Service Type appear in the Entry Fields.

The Entry Fields are divided into three columns:

•

Rate and Priority

Threshold

Miscellaneous

Figure 7-9 shows the SCT Manager with ABR.1 selected. ABR.1 - CosB #1 appears over the Entry Fields

section. 100 in the Maximum Rate field of the Rate and Priority column is highlighted in blue.

To change a parameter in an entry field, select and highlight the field of the parameter you want to change

by double-clicking on it. Then, type in the new value.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -2 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Reset Button

Figure 7-9 SCT Manager w ith ABR.1 Selected

Reset Button

The RESET button resets all of the SCT fields to their saved settings.

Associate Button

The ASSOCIATE button allows you to select a network.To associate an SCT file, select the appropriate

SCT file from the Tree panel and then press the Associate button. Pressing the Associate button opens

a dialog box prompting you for a Port or Card ID. After entering the ID, press the OK button to associate

the SCT file.

Saving a New or Modified SCT

To save a new or modified SCT, click the Save or Save As button in the lower left corner of the SCT

Manager. Enter a new name and press enter.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

SCT Refresh

After you save a changed SCT file, the SCT manager screen is Not automatically updated or refreshed.

You MUST refresh the screen manually in the following manner:

Step 1

Select the root node SCT file

Note

On the SCT tab, the root node name is "SCT File"; on the Node tab, the root node name is "Network".

Step 2

Verify by observing that the tree view has discarded tree nodes and retrieved updated data from the CWM

database.

Note

For the SCT tab, the refresh also occurs when any SCT file is selected and is followed by a closing of

the magnifying glass or collapsing of the root node. Only after re-expanding the root node will the SCT

be refreshed.

Downloading a New SCT

To download an SCT, click on the DOWNLOAD button and follow the instructions in the Download

dialog box.

Verifying that a New SCT is Loaded

To verify that an SCT is loaded, use the following procedure.

Step 1

Step 2

To get to the C:SCT/AXSM directory, type pwd (Present Working Directory) at the controller (PXM)

prompt. This puts you at the C: directory.

pop20two.7.PXM.a > pwd

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Change to the SCT directory by typing cd SCT.

pop20two.7.PXM.a > cd SCT

Change to the AXSM directory by typing cd AXSM.

pop20two.7.PXM.a > cd AXSM

Display the contents of the AXSM directory by typing ls or ll.

pop20two.7.PXM.a > ll

size date time name

-------- ------ ------ --------

512 NOV-17-2000 20:04:28 . <DIR>

512 NOV-17-2000 20:04:28 .. <DIR>

6910 NOV-17-2000 20:04:28 AXSM_SCT.CARD.7

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -2 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

Verifying that a New SCT is Loaded

6910 NOV-17-2000 20:04:30 AXSM_SCT.PORT.7

7212 NOV-17-2000 20:04:30 AXSM_SCT.CARD.2

7212 NOV-17-2000 20:04:30 AXSM_SCT.CARD.3

7212 NOV-17-2000 20:04:30 AXSM_SCT.PORT.2

7212 NOV-17-2000 20:04:30 AXSM_SCT.PORT.3

In the file system :

total space : 819200 K bytes

free space : 702351 K bytes

Note

The following is an example of the directory output for an AXSM-E that is displayed by typing

ls or ll.

size

--------

512

date

------

time

------

name

--------

AUG-17-2001 01:22:04

JUL-11-2001 02:44:30

JUL-11-2001 02:44:32

AUG-09-2001 19:47:44

JUL-11-2001 02:44:32

AUG-03-2001 18:48:02

AUG-03-2001 18:48:14

AUG-03-2001 18:48:02

AUG-03-2001 18:48:14

JUL-11-2001 02:44:32

AUG-09-2001 19:48:08

JUL-11-2001 02:44:32

JUL-24-2001 01:34:42

AUG-16-2001 18:52:48

AUG-16-2001 18:52:54

AUG-09-2001 19:48:22

AUG-17-2001 01:22:06

AUG-17-2001 18:54:54

512

7212

9957

7212

7211

7155

8029

9957

7212

9957

7211

7212

9957

10317

AXSM_SCT.CARD.2

AXSM_SCT.PORT.2

AXSM_SCT.CARD.3

AXSM_SCT.PORT.3

AXSM_SCT.CARD.100

AXSME_SCT.CARD.101

AXSM_SCT.PORT.102

AXSM_SCT.PORT.110

AXSM_SCT.PORT.121

AXSM_SCT.PORT.123

AXSM_SCT.PORT.134

AXSM_SCT.PORT.4

AXSM_SCT.PORT.5

AXSM_SCT.CARD.4

AXSM_SCT.CARD.5

AXSM_SCT.PORT.100

AXSM_SCT.CARD.102

AXSM_SCT.CARD.103

AXSM_SCT.PORT.113

AXSM_SCT.PORT.101

AXSME_SCT.CARD.5

AXSME_SCT.PORT.5

AXSME_SCT.PORT.103

AXSM_SCT.PORT.104

AXSME_SCT.PORT.6

In the file system :

total space : 819200 K bytes

free space : 690456 K bytes

Step 6

Verify that the name of the SCT you are looking for is in the list.

Note

CWM will select SCTs by first sorting SCTs using capital letters and then sorting SCTs using

lower case letters. (i.e. AXSM_SCT.CARD.2 would be selected before axsm_sct.card.2). Be

aware of this when creating a new file name or when sending a file via FTP.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Service Class Template Manager

SCT Manager Maintenance

Note

The CWM SCT manager will select IDs starting at ID 100 and increment by one until it reaches

ID 255. The SCT ID numbers are automatically assigned and automatically associated with the

SCT template file name(s).

SCT Manager Maintenance

The following procedures are used to rebuild SCT manager after a coldstart -F. This rebuild of the SCT

manager could be required after uploading all SCT files, and before creating new SCT files.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

7 -2 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

Statistics Collection Manager

The Statistics Collection Manager (SCM) for Release 10 of CWM features two types of Statistics

Collection Management. One type of SCM is installed as part of the CWM Server installation on the

CWM server workstation, and the other type is a stand-alone SCM that is installed and run from a client

CWM workstation. Both features are described below.

Launching the Statistics Collection Manager

To launch the Statistics Collection Manger application, click on the Statistics Collection Manager icon,

which is found on the Network Topology tool bar, or select the Statistics Collection Manager application

from the Apps pull-down menu located on the main menu bar.

Main Window

After launching the Statistics Collection Manager application for the first time, you will see a root node

called SCM Root in the left panel of the window, as shown in Figure 8-1.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Launching the Statistics Collection Manager

Figure 8-1 Statistics Collection Manager Main Window

Clicking on the eye glass to the left of SCM Root will display the Stats Database Hosts for the SCM

Root, as shown in Figure 8-2.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Launching the Statistics Collection Manager

Figure 8-2 Stats Database Hosts

Click on the host to highlight it, and then select the Options pull-down menu in order to edit current

collection parameters, edit with default parameters, edit with template, delete template, disable

collection statistics, start collection, stop collection or configure database stats.

Figure 8-3 shows the Stats DB Configuration option selected from the Options pull-down menu.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

SCM Statistics Database Configuration

Figure 8-3 Stats DB Configuration Option

SCM Statistics Database Configuration

After selecting the Stats DB Configuration option from the Options pull-down menu, the Stats DB

Host Configuration Dialog appears as shown in Figure 8-4.

When you are finished configuring parameters for the selected Stats DB Host, click Apply and then OK.

“Successful Configure” will appear in the lower left hand corner of the SCM main window.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

SCM Statistics Database Configuration

Figure 8-4 Stats DB Host Configuration

Statistic File Configuration

Save Statistic Files Button

This toggle controls the ability to save files as they are parsed from the statistics parser. You set it to Do

not Save to avoid placing files to the /usr/users/svplus/purge directory. Currently, the save directory is

not configurable. The default is Save.

Save to Directory

Purge File Button

You specify the name of the file directory used to store incoming files to be parsed.

This button controls the ability to purge files as they are parsed from the statistics parser. You set it to

Do not Purge to avoid deleting files from the /usr/users/svplus/purge directory. We recommend you

delete old files. The default is Purge.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Launching the SCM Standalone Collector

Purge Interval (days)

You specify the value (in days) used to determine which old files are purged from the

/usr/users/svplus/purge directory when space in your hard disk’s Incoming partition drops below

twenty megabytes. The files with a date ‘N’ days older than today’s date are purged. (0 = no purging is

done.) The default is 3 days.

Statistic Database Configuration

Purge Interval (hours)

You specify the value (in hours) used to determine how long the data is maintained by the CWM database.

The default retention period is 24 hours. The maximum retention period is 8784 hours (1 year).

Note

If the database contains insufficient space for statistics storage, the statistics collection process

may shut down. If this happens, reduce the purge interval to 12 hours.

Statistic FTP Configuration

Username

You specify the FTP username. The default is svplus.

Password

Enter the FTP password. The screen will display asterisks.

Confirm Password

Reenter your FTP password in this field. Once again, the screen will display asterisks.

Launching the SCM Standalone Collector

The Statistics Collection Manager (SCM) for Release 10 of CWM has a new standalone collector that

allows a separate SCM collection server in both installation and statistics collection, and is installed and

run from a client CWM workstation. This new feature allows you to control and manage statistics

collection through a standalone application. The Statistics Controller Server, Statistics Collection

Server, and Statistics Parser Server provide statistics applicable to the different cards and nodes.

Note

Please refer to Chapter 6 of the CWM Installation Guide for installation procedures for the

Standalone SCM.

Launch SCM Standalone Collector through an xterm window by issuing the SCM command at the

command line. Figure 8-5 shows an xterm window displayed with SCM typed at the command line:

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

SCM Statistics Enable

Figure 8-5 SCM Stand Alone initialization

Figure 8-6 shows an xterm window displayed with the SCM main menu options:

Figure 8-6 SCM start core, stop core, and exit options

SCM Statistics Enable

Figure 8-7 shows the Statistics Enable dialog box which appears after you start the SCM core. This

window allows you to set the collection period in minutes, the time out period in minutes, the bucket

interval in minutes, the number of retries, and the peak statistics enable. The last drop-down in this

dialog box asks whether you would like to use your selected settings as a default template. The switch

implements these selected values and sends confirmation back to the SCM Controller Server.

Note

Statistics Enable is only accepted from the CWM machine which is registered as Statistics

Master on the nodes. (It can be set via telnet to BPX, IGX and IPX nodes by using the

cnfstatmast command; the cnfstatsmgr command must be used for MGX-8220 and

MGX-8250/8230/8850-R1.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

SCM Statistics Update

Figure 8-7 Statistics Enable Dialog

SCM Statistics Update

Figure 8-8 shows the Update Stats enabling information window which appears after the parameters in

the Statistics Enable dialog box have been set.

Figure 8-8 Update Stats enabling inform ation

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

SCM Statistics Disable

Figure 8-9 shows the Disable Collection Statistics option, and Figure 8-10 shows Statistics Disabling

completed.

Figure 8-9 Disabling Stats

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

SCM Statistics Collection

Figure 8-10 Statistics Disabling com plete

SCM Statistics Collection

Figure 8-11 shows the Start Statistics Collection option. Figure 8-12 shows the Statistics Collection

configuration dialog box which appears after the Start Statistics Collection option has been selected.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -1 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

SCM Statistics Collection

Figure 8-11 Start Statistics Collection

Figure 8-12 Statistics Collection configuration

Figure 8-13 shows the Statistics Collection started, with collection parameters, values and statistics

populating the appropriate data fields in the right panel of the SCM main window.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

SCM Statistics Collection

Figure 8-13 Statistics Collection started

Figure 8-14 displays pending and completed stats file information, and Figure 8-15 displays stats file

summary information

Figure 8-14 .Pending and com pleted stats files inform ation

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -1 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Stop Statistics Collection

Figure 8-15 Stats File sum m ary inform ation

Stop Statistics Collection

Figure 8-16 shows the Stop Collection option. After selecting the Stop Collection option from the

Options pull-down menu, the Stop Collection dialog box appears as shown in Figure 8-17.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

SCM Primary/Secondary/Tertiary

Figure 8-16 Stop Stats collection

Figure 8-17 Stop Stats collection confirm ation

SCM Primary/Secondary/Tertiary

SCM Primary/Secondary/Tertiary GUIs provide distributed collection and statistics collection

redundancy. SCM redundancy means that the secondary and tertiary SCM collection servers still

continue to collect statistics when the primary SCM collection server is not reachable or completely shut

down. Distributed collection means that you can distribute statistics collection from all switch nodes to

different SCM collection servers. For example, if the connection to the Primary SCM is shut down for

any reason, whether the FTP or TFTP connection has been disrupted, or if the Primary SCM shuts down,

then the Secondary SCM can take over the statistics collection processes. If the Secondary SCM shuts

down for any reason, the Tertiary SCM can take over the statistics collection processes.

P/S/T is always dependant upon the assignment of the collection server. You can use the cnfcollsvr

command to redirect collectors to a CWM host.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -1 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

CWM-CWM Communications

The Start Collection Dialog allows collection configuration for the Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary

collection servers. Also, the stats database host can be set, and IP Routing can be designated as inband

or out-of-band as seen in Figure 8-12.

CWM-CWM Communications

Release 10 of Cisco WAN Manager has been designed to enable multiple CWM workstations to manage

a network with improved network synchronization and scalability. The architecture uses a server-client

structure for communications between the CWM server and client processes.

CWM workstations use CWM-CWM Communications to synchronize user data with each other. When

user data is provisioned or changed, the CWM workstations will propagate the new data to the other

CWM workstations. The user is able to continue the provisioning of network data, even when

communications between a Primary CWM and Secondary CWM have been interrupted. If for any reason

the communications between CWM servers are interrupted, the provisioning of the user data will be

suspended on the Secondary CWM, but not on the Primary CWM as user data provisioning will continue

on the Primary CWM. During that time, the provisioning of user data and monitoring of the network are

not impacted.

In a given wide area network managed by Release 10 of CWM, the first CWM workstation to begin

operation will assume the role of Primary CWM. As other CWM workstations become active, they will

take on Secondary CWM workstation roles. The only difference in function between Primary and

Secondary CWM workstations is that the Primary CWM workstation would provide the Secondary

CWM workstations with user data when the Secondary CWM workstation launches.

Priority numbers of all Secondaries are assigned by the Primary at the time a Secondary registers with

the Primary. It is based on “first-come-first-serve” logic. All the Secondaries have the same privilege

except that the Secondary with priority 1 will take over as the Primary if the Primary shuts down.

SCM CWM-CWM Gateway Support

Stats collection is populated from the Primary SCM to the Secondary SCM. Primary gateways save

enabling information and forward data to the Secondary host via the Stats Master.

Time Sync

Timing in SCM is qualified by the node time and a sequence to connect from Primary to Secondary with

a set maximum amount of retries.

SCM Inband and Out-of-band

TFTP and FTP are used to transfer files using the network IP address for inband communications, and

the LAN IP address for out-of-band communications.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

SCM Dual Collectors for Legacy Nodes

Dual collectors for Legacy Nodes include the following: BPX, IPX, IGX, Axis, MGX 8850 Release 1;

single collector for MGX 8850 Release 2.

SES Nodes include MGX 8850 Release 2, and BPX/SES.

SCM History Files Collection

The default for History Files Collection in stand alone SCM is No History Files Collection. History Files

collection can be set from one to a maximum of three files for collection.

Group Nodes by Platform

Node View

The node view provides a hierarchical view of network elements. The node panel enables you to do the

following operations:

•

Select a node in the navigator panel to edit collection parameters or to begin or end statistics

collection

•

Select a specific node or element to configure statistics collection

Display the statistics collection parameters after selecting a node

Select multiple nodes to start, stop, or enable collection

Figure 8-18 shows nodes grouped by platform.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -1 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Card Families

Figure 8-18 Nodes grouped by platform

Window Refresh

SCM provides a refresh option that displays all changes made to node configurations. To refresh the

SCM window you must collapse the expanded SCM tree, as shown in Figure 8-18, by double clicking

on the root node, and then re-expanding the tree to see the new configuration. This refresh option applies

to Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary configurations.

Card Families

The following is a list of card families mapped to the cards they support. The list is organized by

platform, with card families and the card(s) it supports listed after each platform.

IPX switch:

•

ait_91

–

AIT

cdp_91

–

CDP

sdp_91

–

SDP

LDP

•

fastpad_91

FTC

–

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Card Families

•

uxm_91

–

UXM

uxm_92

–

UXM

uxm_93

–

UXM

frp_91

–

FRP

ntc_91

–

NTC

IGX switch:

•

btm_91

–

BTM

ALM-A

ALM-B

•

cdp_91

–

CDP

UVM

sdp_91

–

SDP

LDP

•

fastpad_91

FTC

uxm_91

–

UXM

uxm_92

–

UXM

uxm_93

–

UXM

urm_93

–

URM

frp_91

–

FRP

UFM

UFM-U

•

ntc_91

NTC

BPX switch:

–

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -1 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Card Families

•

asi-t3_91

–

ASI_T3_2

ASI0_E3

ASI0_T3

•

asi-e3_91

–

ASI_E3_2

asi-oc3_91

–

ASI_OC3

asi-t3_92

–

ASI_T3_2

ASI0_E3

ASI0_T3

•

asi-e3_92

–

ASI_E3_2

asi-oc3_92

–

ASI_OC3

asi-t3_93

–

ASI_T3_2

ASI0_E3

ASI0_T3

•

asi-e3_93

–

ASI_E3_2

asi-oc3_93

–

ASI_OC3

bxm_t3_91

–

BXM_T3_8_SMF

BXM_T3_8_MMF

BXM_T3_8_SMFLR

BXM_T3_8_SNM

BXM_T3_12_SMF

BXM_T3_12_MMF

BXM_T3_12_SMFLR

BXM_T3_12_SNM

•

bxm_t3_92

–

BXM_T3_8_SMF

BXM_T3_8_MMF

BXM_T3_8_SMFLR

BXM_T3_8_SNM

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Card Families

–

BXM_T3_12_SMF

BXM_T3_12_MMF

BXM_T3_12_SMFLR

BXM_T3_12_SNM

•

bxme_t3_92

–

BXM_T3_12 (Enhanced)

bxm_t3_93

–

BXM_T3_8_SMF

BXM_T3_8_MMF

BXM_T3_8_SMFLR

BXM_T3_8_SNM

BXM_T3_12_SMF

BXM_T3_12_MMF

BXM_T3_12_SMFLR

BXM_T3_12_SNM

•

bxme_t3_93

–

BXM_T3_12 (Enhanced)

bxm_e3_91

–

BXM_E3_8_SMF

BXM_E3_8_MMF

BXM_E3_8_SMFLR

BXM_E3_8_SNM

BXM_E3_12_SMF

BXM_E3_12_MMF

BXM_E3_12_SMFLR

BXM_E3_12_SNM

•

bxm_e3_92

–

BXM_E3_8_SMF

BXM_E3_8_MMF

BXM_E3_8_SMFLR

BXM_E3_8_SNM

BXM_E3_12_SMF

BXM_E3_12_MMF

BXM_E3_12_SMFLR

BXM_E3_12_SNM

•

bxme_e3_92

–

BXM_E3_12 (Enhanced)

bxm_e3_93

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -2 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Card Families

–

BXM_E3_8_SMF

BXM_E3_8_MMF

BXM_E3_8_SMFLR

BXM_E3_8_SNM

BXM_E3_12_SMF

BXM_E3_12_MMF

BXM_E3_12_SMFLR

BXM_E3_12_SNM

•

bxme_e3_93

–

BXM_E3_12 (Enhanced)

bxm_oc3_91

–

BXM_OC3_4_SMF

BXM_OC3_4_MMF

BXM_OC3_4_SMFLR

BXM_OC3_4_SNM

BXM_OC3_8_SMF

BXM_OC3_8_MMF

BXM_OC3_8_SMFLR

BXM_OC3_8_SNM

BXM_OC3_4_STM1E

BXM_OC3_8_STM1E

BXM_OC3_4_XLR

BXM_OC3_8_XLR

BPX_MNCH

•

bxm_oc3_92

–

BXM_OC3_4_SMF

BXM_OC3_4_MMF

BXM_OC3_4_SMFLR

BXM_OC3_4_SNM

BXM_OC3_8_SMF

BXM_OC3_8_MMF

BXM_OC3_8_SMFLR

BXM_OC3_8_SNM

BXM_OC3_4_STM1E

BXM_OC3_8_STM1E

BXM_OC3_4_XLR

BXM_OC3_8_XLR

BPX_MNCH

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Card Families

•

bxm_oc3_93

–

BXM_OC3_4_SMF

BXM_OC3_4_MMF

BXM_OC3_4_SMFLR

BXM_OC3_4_SNM

BXM_OC3_8_SMF

BXM_OC3_8_MMF

BXM_OC3_8_SMFLR

BXM_OC3_8_SNM

BXM_OC3_4_STM1E

BXM_OC3_8_STM1E

BXM_OC3_4_XLR

BXM_OC3_8_XLR

BPX_MNCH

•

bxm_oc12_91

BXM_OC12_1_SMF

–

BXM_OC12_1_MMF

BXM_OC12_1_SMFLR

BXM_OC12_1_SNM

BXM_OC12_2_SMF

BXM_OC12_2_MMF

BXM_OC12_2_SMFLR

BXM_OC12_2_SNM

BME_OC12_1_SMF

BME_OC12_1_MMF

BME_OC12_1_SMFLR

BME_OC12_1_SNM

BME_OC12_2_SMF

BME_OC12_2_MMF

BME_OC12_2_SMFLR

BME_OC12_2_SNM

BXM_OC12_1_XLR

BXM_OC12_2_XLR

•

bxm_oc12_92

–

BXM_OC12_1_SMF

BXM_OC12_1_MMF

BXM_OC12_1_SMFLR

BXM_OC12_1_SNM

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -2 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Card Families

–

BXM_OC12_2_SMF

BXM_OC12_2_MMF

BXM_OC12_2_SMFLR

BXM_OC12_2_SNM

BME_OC12_1_SMF

BME_OC12_1_MMF

BME_OC12_1_SMFLR

BME_OC12_1_SNM

BME_OC12_2_SMF

BME_OC12_2_MMF

BME_OC12_2_SMFLR

BME_OC12_2_SNM

BXM_OC12_1_XLR

BXM_OC12_2_XLR

•

bxm_oc12_93

BXM_OC12_1_SMF

–

BXM_OC12_1_MMF

BXM_OC12_1_SMFLR

BXM_OC12_1_SNM

BXM_OC12_2_SMF

BXM_OC12_2_MMF

BXM_OC12_2_SMFLR

BXM_OC12_2_SNM

BME_OC12_1_SMF

BME_OC12_1_MMF

BME_OC12_1_SMFLR

BME_OC12_1_SNM

BME_OC12_2_SMF

BME_OC12_2_MMF

BME_OC12_2_SMFLR

BME_OC12_2_SNM

BXM_OC12_1_XLR

BXM_OC12_2_XLR

•

bxme_oc3_92(Enhanced Cards)

–

BXM_OC3_4_SMF

BXM_OC3_4_MMF

BXM_OC3_4_SMFLR

BXM_OC3_8_SMF

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Card Families

–

BXM_OC3_8_MMF

BXM_OC3_8_SMFLR

BXM_OC3_4_STM1E

BXM_OC3_8_STM1E

BXM_OC3_4_XLR

BXM_OC3_8_XLR

•

bxme_oc3_93(Enhanced Cards)

–

BXM_OC3_4_SMF

BXM_OC3_4_MMF

BXM_OC3_4_SMFLR

BXM_OC3_8_SMF

BXM_OC3_8_MMF

BXM_OC3_8_SMFLR

BXM_OC3_4_STM1E

BXM_OC3_8_STM1E

BXM_OC3_4_XLR

BXM_OC3_8_XLR

BXM_OC12_1_SMF

bxme_oc12_92(Enhanced Cards)

–

BXM_OC12_1_MMF

BXM_OC12_1_SMFLR

BXM_OC12_2_SMF

BXM_OC12_2_MMF

BXM_OC12_2_SMFLR

BME_OC12_1_SMF

BME_OC12_2_SMF

BME_OC12_2_SMFLR

BME_OC12_2_SNM

BXM_OC12_1_XLR

BXM_OC12_2_XLR

bxme_oc12_93(Enhanced Cards)

–

BXM_OC12_1_MMF

BXM_OC12_1_SMFLR

BXM_OC12_2_SMF

BXM_OC12_2_MMF

BXM_OC12_2_SMFLR

BME_OC12_1_SMF

BME_OC12_2_SMF

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -2 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Card Families

–

BME_OC12_2_SMFLR

BME_OC12_2_SNM

BXM_OC12_1_XLR

BXM_OC12_2_XLR

•

bni-t3_91

–

BNI_T3

bni-t3_92

–

BNI_T3

bni-t3_93

–

BNI_T3

bni-e3_91

–

BNI_E3

bni-e3_92

–

BNI_E3

bni-e3_93

–

BNI_E3

bni-oc3_91

–

BNI_OC3

bni-oc3_92

–

BNI_OC3

bni-oc3_93

–

BNI_OC3

AXIS:

• frsm_40

–

FRSM_4T1

FRSM_4E1

FRSM_4T1_C

FRSM_4E1_C

FRSM_HS1

FRSM_HS1_B

FRSM_8T1

FRSM_8E1

FRSM_2CT3

FRSM_2T3

FRSM_2E3

FRSM_2HS2

•

ausm_40

AUSM_4T1

–

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Card Families

–

AUSM_4E1

AUSM_8T1

AUSM_8E1

AUSM_B_8T1

AUSM_B_8E1

•

cesm_40

–

CESM_4T1

CESM_4E1

CESM_8T1

CESM_8E1

CESM_T3

CESM_E3

•

bnm-t3_40

–

BNM_T3

bnm-e3_40

–

BNM_E3

bnm-155_40

–

BNM_155

POPEYE Release 1:

• frsm_40

–

FRSM_4T1

FRSM_4E1

FRSM_4T1_C

FRSM_4E1_C

FRSM_HS1

FRSM_HS1_B

FRSM_8T1

FRSM_8E1

FRSM_2CT3

FRSM_2T3

FRSM_2E3

FRSM_2HS2

•

ausm_40

–

AUSM_4T1

AUSM_4E1

AUSM_8T1

AUSM_8E1

AUSM_B_8T1

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -2 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Card Families

–

AUSM_B_8E1

•

cesm_40

–

CESM_4T1

CESM_4E1

CESM_8T1

CESM_8E1

CESM_T3

CESM_E3

•

pxm_1_40

–

PXM_1

PXM_OC3

PXM_OC12

PXM_T3E3

•

srm-t3_92

–

SRM_3T3

SRME

srm-SONET_92

–

SRME_1OC3

SRME_1STS3

POPEYE II:

•

axsmt3e3_50

–

AXSM16_T3E3

AXSM16_T3E3_B(AXSM B)

•

axsmoc3-12_50

–

AXSM8_OC3

AXSM16_OC3

AXSM16_OC3_B(axsm B)

AXSM4_OC12

AXSM4_OC12_B(axsm B)

•

axsmoc48_50

–

AXSM1_OC48

AXSM1_OC48_B(axsm B)

•

axsmet3e3_50

–

AXSM16_T3E3_E

axsmeoc3-12_50

–

AXSM8_OC3_E

AXSM2_OC12_E

AXSM8_STM1_E

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Configuring Statistics Collection

After parameters have been set, right click to choose one of the following options:

•

Edit Current Collection Parameters—Allows current collection parameters to be edited.

Edit with Default Parameters—Allows current collection parameters to be edited with default

parameters.

•

Edit with Template—Allows editing with template.

Delete Template—Allows you to delete a template.

Disable Collection Statistics—Allows you to disable collection statistics.

Start Collection—Tells the Statistics Manager to begin collecting statistics from the selected nodes,

if the node has statistics enabled.

•

Stop Collection—Tells the Statistics Manger to stop collecting from the selected nodes, if statistics

are already being collected.

Stats DB Host Configuration—Sets statistics parameters for the File and Database, including Save

Statistics Files, Purge File, and Purge Interval.

Note

The Start Collection option is not enabled unless statistics have been enabled for a network element.

Table 8-1 Statistics Collection Param eters (m odifiable)

Parameter

Description

Collection Period

Specify the interval value (in minutes) where

statistics are gathered from the network. The

collection period refers to the time it takes to

create a stats file. The file will include multiple

buckets.

The default is 15 minutes.

Time-Out Period

Bucket Interval

Specify the time-out value (in minutes for TFTP

GET requests. Increase this value on busy

networks. Busy networks should be configured

for a high value.

The default is 120 minutes.

Specify the Bucket Interval Period value (in

minutes) to be kept for the single bucket on the

node.

The default is 15 minutes.

Number of Retries

Specify the number of retries the child process

makes in attempting to get files from the network.

The default is 3 retries.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -2 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Configuring Statistics Collection

Table 8-1 Statistics Collection Param eters (m odifiable)

Parameter

Description

Peak Statistics Enable

Specify peak statistics values on network by

selecting No or Yes. The peak value represents the

maximum value of buckets.

The default is No.

Use as a default template

You have the option to use this as a default

template by selecting No or Yes.

Yes is the default.

How Statistics are Used

Statistics are used to show network performance. Raw data can be used for monitoring nodes in your

network, and for customer billing purposes. The Wingz Reports application provides statistics collection

reporting.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Statistics Collection Manager

Configuring Statistics Collection

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

8 -3 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

Summary Report and Wingz Report

This chapter describes the Summary Report application and the Wingz Report application.

Overview of Summary Reports and Wingz Reports

The CWM Summary Report application is designed to provide easy access to basic performance reports.

Once you select the report type, object instance, and plot duration, the report data is retrieved from the

CWM Statistics Collection Manager (SCM), and is plotted within the respective Report Application

window.

The Performance Data reports are based on historical statistics collected by the CWM SCM. To generate

a report, you must select the appropriate statistic type. No restrictions exist on the bucket interval setting

for Summary Reports. When the bucket interval changes within the report plot period, the Summary

Report application makes an adjustment to normalize the data according to the plot interval. The CWM

Summary Report application issues an error when a bucket interval change is detected within the plot

period.

Note

Restrictions exist on the bucket interval setting for Wingz Reports. The bucket interval must match the

bucket interval set in SCM.

The following CWM Summary Reports are available:

•

Resource Capacity

–

Network Report

Top Utilization Report

•

Performance Data

–

Connection

Connection Traffic Summary

Connection Traffic Dropped Summary (not currently supported for CESM)

–

Trunk

Trunk Traffic Summary

Port

Port Traffic Summary

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9 -1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Launching WingZ Reports

The current Wingz based Report application provides a very complex and flexible interface that allows

you to select and manipulate a large number of statistic types.

To launch Wingz reports, complete the following procedure:

Step 1

Step 2

Open a terminal window.

Enter the runwingz command at the prompt.

Note

If you enter an uppercase w, for example, Wingz, the Statistics button will not be displayed on

the Wingz toolbar.

Entering the runwingz command at the prompt displays the CWM Statistics window, shown in

Figure 9-1, “CWM Statistics Window ”.

Figure 9-1 CWM Statistics Window

This application provides access to your network statistics stored in the Informix OnLine database via

the Statistics menu in the CWM Statistics window. The Statistics menu provides options to display data

reports, edit object linkage, and deactivate statistics generation on non-existent nodes.

Statistics Menu

You select this menu to access the following menu options:

Raw Data Report Option

You select this option to filter the graphical reports of data according to the choices provided in the

menu.

Remove non-active Node Option

You select this option to remove statistics for nodes no longer in use.

Initialize Option

You select this option to reset the Statistics pull-down windows.

Note

Timestamps on the statistics buckets collected by CWM are synchronized with network time.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9 -2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Raw Data Reports

The Raw Data Report option displays the Raw Data Report window. This window provides options

allowing you to enable customization of your reports. You select this option to generate reports for

Connections, Service Lines, Trunks, and Ports. Once you select one of these object types in the Raw Data

Report form, associated parameter fields are displayed.

You use the same procedure to configure all types of Raw Data Reports.

Figure 9-2 Raw Data Report Window

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9 -3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Raw Data Reports

Table 9-1 Tim e Input Type

Time Input Type

Description

Use this parameter to define statistics spanning a starting date and

Start & End

time, to an ending date and time.

Start + Period

Use this parameter to define statistics beginning at a starting date and

time, and spanning a specified period or minutes (m), days (d), and/or

hours (h).

Example:

To indicate a single value for one day and two hours and 10 minutes,

type: 1d 2h 10m

Period to Current

(default)

Use this parameter to define statistics from the present backwards,

with values of minutes (m), hours (h), or days (d).

Type the number of m, h, or d into the Report Period field.

Example:

To indicate a value for 24 hours, type: 24h

1. After you define a time value, select an object name in the Objects Available field. This results in

the display of the selected statistics in the Report Data field.

2. Click on the Plot button to start the query. A Querying database window is displayed for each

statistic retrieved during the search process. When no statistics are found, the “No data available”

message is displayed. When statistics are enabled and collected, a Select Graph Type window is

displayed.

A displayed Raw Data Report can be printed selecting the Page Preview or Print option in the File menu

on the Wingz menu bar (titled CWM Statistics).

Remove Non-Active Nodes

Select this option from the Statistics menu to display the Remove Node menu. In the Target Node pane,

select the nodes you want to delete, then click on the Apply button. When no non-active nodes exist, a

“No non-active node is defined in the database” message is displayed.

Initialize

Select this option to reset the Statistics window.

Delete Statistical Records

Use the delstrecs function to delete statistical records associated with an object database that no longer

exists.

To start a delete statistics operation, type delstrecs on the CWM console command line. You are asked

to indicate a retention period in days. Records older than the specified number of days are deleted. More

recent records are retained.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9 -4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Launching Summary Reports

To delete all records not associated with an active object, and to delete all unmatched records regardless

of age, type a zero when prompted for retention period. You should perform this operation periodically

to clean out the statistics database.

Launching Summary Reports

To launch summary reports, complete the following procedure:

Step 1

Step 2

Open a terminal window.

Enter the NWReport command at the prompt.

The summary report window (see Figure 9-3) displays statistical and graphical data for the selected

report type.

Configuring Summary Reports

This section describes how to use summary reports.

Select a report type option from either the Resource Capacity or Performance Data menus. When you

select the Resource Capacity menu’s Network Report option, a statistical and graphical view of the

resources being utilized at every node in the network is displayed in the Result pane in this window.

Select any of the Performance Data menu’s options for a list of report filters available through

Connection - Connection Traffic Summary, Connection - Connection Traffic Dropped, Trunk - Trunk

Traffic, or Port - Port Traffic Summary windows, respectively. You need to select the desired report filter

options in these windows, then click on the Plot button. The statistical and graphical data is then

displayed in the Report Application window.

Note

Unlike the Wingz application, only one report is displayed at a time.

When a report is displayed in the Result pane, print or save it in an ASCII file.

File—Save Menu Option

Select this option to save the data used to plot the graph into a CSF (Comma Separated Format) file you

specify. When multiple graphs are displayed, each graph is saved in a separate file. A unique file name

is created by appending a number to the file name specified. The graphs are numbered left to right. Each

file has a “.csf” extension and the files are saved in the /usr/users/svplus/report directory.

File—Print Menu Option

Select this option to choose a printer or file name. Select file name, and a postscript image is saved to

the /usr/users/svplus/report/<file_name>.ps file, where <file_name> is the name of the file specified.

When multiple graphs or tables are displayed on the screen, all graphs or tables are saved in the same file.

File—Exit Menu Option

Select this option to terminate the Report Application. The Report Application window is closed.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9 -5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Configuring Summary Reports

Resource Capacity—Network Report Menu Option

Select this option to display basic node information for all nodes in the network in the Network Report

window. This report provides a view of the resources being utilized at every node in the network.

Resource Capacity—Top Utilization Report Menu Option

Select this option to display the top utilized trunks, ports, or connections for the entire network or a

specified node.

Performance Data—Connection - Connection Traffic Summary Menu Option

Select this option to specify the connection to be plotted and the plot duration through the Connection

Traffic Summary window.

Upon specifying the desired report options and clicking on the Plot button, the total traffic transmitted

and received, as well as, the availability for a selected PVC are displayed in the Report Application

window. Data for both ends of the connection are plotted side by side in this window.

Performance Data—Connection - Connection Traffic Dropped Summary Menu Option

Select this option to specify the connection to be plotted and the plot duration through the Connection

Traffic Dropped window.

Upon specifying the desired report options and clicking on the Plot button, the totals of the dropped

traffic for a selected PVC are displayed in the Report Application window. Data for both ends of the

connection are plotted side by side in this window.

Note

The Connection Traffic Dropped Summary menu option is not currently supported for CESM cards.

Performance Data—Trunk -Trunk Traffic Summary Menu Option

Select this option to specify the trunk to be plotted and the plot duration through the Trunk Traffic

Summary window.

Upon specifying the desired report options and clicking on the Plot button, the total traffic transmitted

and received and the unavailability for a selected trunk are displayed in the Report Application window.

Data for both ends of the trunk are plotted side by side.

Note

For Cisco MGX 8220 feeder trunks, only the routing node end of the trunks are supported as the

Cisco MGX 8220 end-point does not support the required statistic types.

Performance Data—Port - Port Traffic Summary Menu Option

Select this option to specify the port to be plotted and the plot duration through the Port Traffic Summary

window.

Upon specifying the desired report options and clicking on the Plot button, the total traffic transmitted

and received and the unavailability for a selected port are displayed in the Report Application window.

Data for both ends of the port are plotted side by side.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9 -6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Configuring Summary Reports

Note

For Cisco MGX 8220 feeder trunks, only the routing node end of the trunks are supported as the

Cisco MGX 8220 end-point does not support the required statistic types.

Result Pane

This pane is used to display statistical and graphical data, as well as status and error messages.

Network Report

The Network Report window is displayed when you select the Resource Capacity menu’s Network

Report option in the Summary Reports application window, as shown in Figure 9-3. This report provides

you a view of the resources being utilized at every node in the network.

Figure 9-3 Netw ork Report Window

This is a two part report. The report’s top half displays statistical information in tabular format for each

node in the network. The following information is listed for each node:

•

node name

node type

number of trunks on this node

number of completed connections originating/terminating on this node

number of incomplete connection on this node (part of a multi-segment connection)

total CIR originating/terminating on this node

The report’s bottom portion displays two graphs. The first graph is a pie chart displaying the break-down

by node type (Cisco BPX 8600, Cisco MGX 8220, Cisco MGX 8800, Cisco IGX 8400, or other). The

second graph displays the CIR distribution in the network.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9 -7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Configuring Summary Reports

Top Utilization Reports

The Top Utilization Reports is displayed when you select the Resource Capacity menu’s Top

Utilization Report option in the Report Application window, as shown in Figure 9-4. The Top

Utilization Report lists as the top 10 (or as many as you select with a maximum of 50) utilized trunks,

ports, or PVCs depending on which object is selected. The user can specify a network wide report or a

report for a given node. The user also can specify the number of top utilized objects. In addition, if the

user specifies a report for a given node, then the node must be specified.

Figure 9-4 Top Utilization Report Window

After the report is generated, a bar graph is displayed giving the respective utilization of each port, trunk,

or PVC.

When you select to list the Top Utilized Trunks, the report application retrieves the required statistics,

described in T a ble 9-2, and performs the following calculations for each trunk:

•

percent bytes received from the network (number of packets/cells) received per second/line load) *

100.

percent bytes transmitted to the network (number of packets/cells) transmitted per second/line load)

* 100.

percent utilization of the trunk = percent bytes received from the network + percent bytes

transmitted to the network.

Table 9-2 Required Statistics for Top Utilized Trunks Report

Percentage of Cells Received

(Stats ID)

Percentage of Cells Received

(Stats ID)

Trunk Type

Narrow Band

—

Total packets transmitted (23)

Total cells transmitted (37)

Total cells transmitted to line (52)

Cisco IGX 8400-ATM Total cells received (38)

Cisco BPX 8600-ATM BXM: Total Cells Rx (219

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9 -8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Configuring Summary Reports

Report Definition Pane

This Report Definition pane is comprised of the following components:

Select Object

Report Type

Click on the button Connections, Trunks, or Ports to select the object for report generation.

Choose either the network wide or node report. The default is network wide.

How many to list

Node Name

Specify the number of objects to be listed in the report. The default is 10 and the maximum is 50.

Specify the node and interface shelf names if the report is for a node only. Click on the “...” button to

display the Node: Shelf Selection window. Select a node name and corresponding shelf name from this

window. This area is inactive if you have selected a network wide report.

Plot Duration

Selections for time of day (TOD), previous hour (Prev Hour), previous day (Prev Day), and previous

week (Prev Week) are displayed. Indicate the Start Date and Stop Date in dd/mm/yy (day/month/year)

format and the Start Time and Stop Time in hh.mm (hour.minute) format.

Choose this button to generate the report.

Cancel

Choose this button to clear all fields and return to the Report Main Window.

Connection Traffic Summary

The Connection Traffic Summary window is displayed when you select the Performance Data menu’s

Connection Traffic Summary option from the Connection submenu in the Performance Data’s menu,

as shown in Figure 9-5. You must select a PVC and plotting time interval, then click on the Plot button

to have the statistical information pertaining to connection traffic, plotted into graphs for both ends of

the connection and displayed in the Report Application window.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9 -9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Configuring Summary Reports

Figure 9-5 Connection Traffic Sum m ary Window

The statistic types used to plot this report are based on the end-point type of the connection. Table 9-3

describes the statistic types needed. The Report Application retrieves all instances (within the plot

period) of the statistic types from the database and calculates the following:

•

percent received from the network = (number of bits per second / CIR) * 100

percent transmitted to the network = (number of bits per second / CIR) * 100

percentage of time in service = (seconds in service / (bucket interval * 60)) * 100

The following conversions are used to convert to bits per second:

•

for FR endpoints, convert bytes received to bits per second (number of bytes received / (bucket

interval * 60)) * 8

•

for ATM/CE endpoints, convert cells received to bits per second, using Connection Manager’s

conversion formula (each cell has a 48 byte payload)

— bps = (number cells received / (bucket interval * 60)) * 48 * 8

for VOICE/DATA endpoints, convert packets to bits per second (each packet has 24 bytes)

— bps = ((number packets received / (bucket interval * 60)) * 24 * 8

•

When the Include Peak Data button is enabled, the percent peak values of the total traffic transmitted

and received for a selected PVC are displayed along with the average values in the same graph. The

average raw counts are displayed in tabular form.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9 -1 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Configuring Summary Reports

Data for both ends of the connection are plotted side by side. The statistic types used to plot this report

are based on the end-point type of the connection. The Report Application retrieves peak instances

(within the plot period) of all statistic types from the database and calculates the following:

•

peak number of bytes received from the network (in percentage of CIR) = (peak number of bits

received per second / CIR) * 100

•

peak number of bytes transmitted to the network (in percentage of CIR) = (peak number of bits

transmitted per second / CIR) * 100

The following conversions are used to convert to bits per second:

•

For FR endpoints, convert bytes received to bits per second (peak number of bytes received * 8) /

(peak interval * 60)

•

for ATM/CE endpoints, convert cells received to bits per second, using Connection Manager’s

conversion formula (each cell has a 48 byte payload)

–

peak bps = (peak number cells received * 48 * 8) / (peak interval * 60)

for VOICE/DATA endpoints, convert packets to bits per second (each packet has 24 bytes)

peak bps = (peak number packets received * 24 * 8) / (peak interval * 60)

•

–

Table 9-3 Required Statistics for Connection Traffic Sum m ary Report

Percentage of Bytes

Received (Stats ID)

Percentage of Bytes Transmitted

(Stats ID)

Percentage of Time in Service

(Stats ID)

End-point Type

Bytes received (9)

Bytes transmitted (11)

Cells transmitted Port(45)

Total cells transmitted (61)

Total cells transmitted (71)

Packets transmitted (6)

Seconds In Service (16)

—

ASI - ATM

AUSM - ATM

Cells received Port (29)

Total cells received (68)

Seconds In Service (16)

—

Cisco MGX 8220 - CE Total cells received (72)

Voice

Data

Packets received (4)

Seconds In Service (16)

Select Connection for Report Pane

This Select Connection for Report pane is comprised of the following components:

Clear Button

Filter Button

Click on this button to clear the Connection Identifier pane and return to the default settings.

Click on this button to populate the Connection Identifier pane with the connections matching the

report filter options specified.

Connection Type Buttons

Click on a button (Voice, Data, FR, ATM, or CE) to select that particular connection type. A list of the

connections corresponding to that connection type are displayed in the Connection Identifier pane once

you click on the Filter button. By default, all connection types are selected.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Configuring Summary Reports

Node Name

Specify the node and interface shelf names for the end point in this field. Click on the “...” button to

display the Node:Shelf Selection window. Select a node name and corresponding shelf name from this

window. The default is all connections (this field is blank).

Slot.Line.Port

Specify the end-point’s slot and port numbers in this field. The default is all ports (this field is blank).

Connection List

This region is populated when you select the Filter button. All connections matching the filter criteria

are displayed in this region. Select a single entry from the list for plotting.

Each entry in the list has the following format:

Connection Identifier—the local and remote endpoints are displayed in this column. When certain

fields are not applicable, “..” is displayed. For example, for routing nodes, <interfaceshelfname> is

displayed as “..”.

•

The format of the endpoints is as follows:

–

For Frame Relay: <nodename>.<interfaceshelfname>.<slot>.<line>.<port>.<DLCI>

For ATM: <nodename>.<interfaceshelfname>.<slot>.<line>.<port>.<vpi>.<vci>

For CE, Voice, and Data: <nodename>.<interfaceshelfname>.<slot>.<line>.<port>

•

Type—the end-point types for the local and remote ends are displayed in this column.

CIR—the CIRs for the local and remote ends are displayed in this column.

Report Type Pane

Include Peak Data

Peak Interval

The Report Type pane is comprised of the following components:

Specify Include Peak Data along with Peak Interval to display the highest value in that interval.

Select peak intervals from the values of 1, 5, 6, 10, 12, and 15 minutes if the Include Peak Data button

has been enabled. The default value is 5 minutes (300 seconds).

Note

You must select the same peak interval as the one enabled during statistics collection.

Plot Duration

Selections for time of day (TOD), previous hour (Prev Hour), previous day (Prev Day), and previous

week (Prev Week) are displayed. The default value is TOD.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9 -1 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Configuring Summary Reports

When you select Prev Hour, Prev Day, or Prev Week, the Start Date/Start Time fields are inactive,

and when the Stop Date/Stop Time fields are blank, they are populated with the current date and time.

When you modify the stop date/time, the modified value is used for the plot duration. When you select

TOD, both Start Date/Start Time and Stop Date/End Time fields are activated, and the Stop

Date/End Time fields are populated with the current date and time.

Start Date/Start Time

Stop Date/End Time

Cumulation Period

Specify the starting date and time for the graph in this field.

Specify the stop date and time for the graph in this field.

Click on the appropriate button (Hourly, Daily, or Weekly) to set the report’s plot interval. The default

selection is Hourly.

Result Pane

The Result Pane displays status and error messages:

Plot Button

Click on this button to initiate the plotting of the report. The data and graphs are displayed in the Report

Application window.When statistic entries are not found, an error message is displayed in the Result

pane. Otherwise, the Result pane displays the number of entries found.

Cancel Button

Click on this button to cancel the current report filter operation and close this window.

Connection Traffic Dropped Window

The Connection Traffic Dropped window is displayed when you select the Performance Data menu’s

Connection Traffic Dropped option from the Connection submenu in the Performance Data’s menu,

as shown in Figure 9-6. You must select a PVC and plotting time interval, then click on the Plot button

to have the statistical information pertaining to the total traffic dropped for a selected PVC, plotted into

graphs for both ends of the connection and displayed in the Report Application window.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Configuring Summary Reports

Figure 9-6 Connection Traffic Dropped Window

The statistic types used to plot this report are based on the end-point type of the connection. Table 9-4

describes the statistics types needed. The Report Application retrieves all instances (within the plot

period) of the statistics types from the database and calculates the following:

•

Percentage of received bytes dropped = (number of bps of received bytes dropped / CIR) * 100

Percentage of transmitted bytes dropped = (number of bps of transmitted bytes dropped / CIR) * 100

When the Include Peak Data button is enabled, the percent peak values of the dropped traffic for a

selected PVC are displayed. Data for both ends of the connection are plotted side by side. The statistic

types used to plot this report are based on the end-point type of the connection. The Report Application

retrieves statistics from the database and calculates the following:

•

Peak number of bytes received bytes dropped (in percentage of CIR) = (peak number of bits received

per second) / CIR) * 100

•

Peak number of bytes transmitted dropped (in percentage of CIR) = (peak number of bits transmitted

per second) / CIR) * 100

The following conversions are used to convert to bits per second:

•

For FR endpoints, convert bytes received to bits per second (peak number of bytes received * 8) /

(peak interval * 60)

•

For ATM/CE endpoints, convert cells received to bits per second, using cmgrd’s conversion formula

(each cell has a 48 byte payload)

peak bps = (peak number cells received * 48 * 8) / (peak interval * 60)

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9 -1 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Configuring Summary Reports

•

For VOICE/DATA endpoints, convert packets to bits per second (each packet has 24 bytes)

peak bps = (peak number packets received * 24 * 8) / (peak interval * 60)

Note

Cells discarded is not supported on ASI and AUSM.

Table 9-4 Required Statistics for Connection Traffic Dropped Report

Percentage of Received Bytes

Discarded (Stats ID)

Percentage of Transmitted Bytes Discarded

(Stats ID)

End-point Type

Received bytes discarded (10)

Transmitted bytes discarded (12)

ASI - ATM

AUSM - ATM

Voice

—

Received bytes discarded (5)

Data

Trunk Traffic Summary Window

The Trunk Traffic Summary window is displayed when you select the Performance Data menu’s Trunk

Traffic Summary option in the Report Application window, as shown in Figure 9-7. You must select a

trunk type and plotting time interval, then click on the Plot button to have the statistical information

pertaining to the trunk traffic, plotted into graphs and displayed in the Report Application window.

Note

For Cisco MGX 8220 feeder trunks, only the routing node end of the trunks are supported as the

Cisco MGX 8220 end-point does not support the required statistic types.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Configuring Summary Reports

Figure 9-7 Trunk Traffic Sum m ary Window

The statistic types used to plot this report are based on the trunk’s end-point type. T a ble 9-5 describes

the statistic types needed. The Report Application retrieves all instances (within the plot period) of the

statistics types from the database and calculates the following:

•

percentage of bytes received from network = (number of packets or cells received per second / line

load) * 100

percentage of bytes transmitted to the network = (number of packets or cells transmitted per second

/ line load) * 100

percentage of time unavailable = (unavailable seconds / (bucket interval * 60)) * 100

When the Include Peak Data button is enabled, the percent peak values of the total traffic transmitted

and received for a selected trunk are displayed. The percent peak values are plotted in the same graph

with the percent average data. Data for both ends of the trunk are plotted side by side. The Report

Application retrieves statistics from the database and calculates the following:

•

peak number of bytes received from the network (in percentage of line load) = ((peak number of

packets or cells received) / (peak interval * line load)) * 100

•

peak number of bytes transmitted to the network (in percentage of line load) = ((peak number of

packets or cells transmitted) / (peak interval * line load)) * 100

The statistic types used to plot this report are based on the end-point type of the connection.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9 -1 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Configuring Summary Reports

Table 9-5 Required Statistics for Trunk Traffic Sum m ary Report

Percentage of Cells Received

(Stats ID)

Percentage of Cells Transmitted

(Stats ID)

Percentage Unavailable

(Stats ID)

Trunk Type

Narrow band

Cisco IPX - ATM

—

Total packets transmitted (23)

—

Total cells received from line (68) Total cells transmitted to line (61) Unavailable Seconds (39)

Cisco IGX 8400 - ATM Total cells received (38)

Cisco BPX 8600 - ATM BXM: Total Cells Rx (219)

Total cells transmitted (37)

—

Total cells transmitted to line (52) Unavailable Seconds (39)

Select Trunk for Report Pane

The Select Trunk for Report pane is comprised of the following components:

Clear Button

Filter Button

Click on this button to clear the Trunk Identifier pane and return to the default settings.

Click on this button to populate the Trunk Identifier pane with the trunks matching the report filter

options specified.

Trunk Type

Node Name

A set of toggle buttons corresponding to the trunk types supported (Narrow Band, IPX-ATM, IGX

8400-ATM, BPX 8600-ATM, and Feeder) are displayed in this area. By default, all trunk types are

selected.

Specify the node and interface shelf names for the local end point in this field. Click on the “...” button

to display the Node: Shelf Selection window. Select the node name and corresponding shelf name from

this window. The default is all nodes (the field is blank).

Slot.Port

Specify the end-point’s slot number in this field. The default is all slots (the field is blank).

Trunk List

This region is populated when you select the Filter button. All trunks matching the filter criteria are

displayed in this region. A single entry from the list for plotting can be selected.

Each entry in the list has the following format:

•

Trunk Identifier—the local and remote endpoints are displayed in this column. The format of the

endpoints is as follows: <nodename>.<slot>.<port>.<vtrk>

•

Card Type—the end-point card type for the local and remote ends are displayed in this column.

Load—the line loads for the local and remote ends are displayed in this column.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Configuring Summary Reports

Report Type Pane

The Report Type pane is comprised of the following components:

Include Peak Data

Peak Interval

Specify Include Peak Data along with Peak Interval to display the highest value in that interval.

Select peak intervals from the values of 1, 5, 6, 10, 12, and 15 minutes if the Include Peak Data button

has been enabled. The default value is 5 minutes (300 seconds).

Note

You must select the same peak interval as the one enabled during statistics collection.

Plot Duration

Selections for time of day (TOD), previous hour (Prev Hour), previous day (Prev Day), and previous

week (Prev Week) are displayed. The default value is TOD.

When you select Prev Hour, Prev Day, or Prev Week, the Start Date/Start Time fields are inactive,

and when the Stop Date/Stop Time fields are blank, they are populated with the current date and time.

When you modify the stop date/time, the modified value is used for the plot duration. When you select

TOD, both Start Date/Start Time and Stop Date/End Time fields are activated, and the Stop

Date/End Time fields are populated with the current date and time.

Start Date/Start Time

Stop Date/End Time

Cumulation Period

Specify the starting date and time for the graph in this field.

Specify the stop date and time for the graph in this field.

Click on the appropriate button (Hourly, Daily, or Weekly) to set the report’s plot interval. The default

selection is Hourly.

Result Pane

Status and error messages are displayed in this pane.

Plot Button

Click on this button to initiate the plotting of the report. When statistic entries are not found, an error

message is displayed in the Result pane. Otherwise, the Result pane displays the number of entries

found.

Cancel Button

Click on this button to cancel the current report filter operation and close this window.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9 -1 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Configuring Summary Reports

Port Traffic Summary Window

The Port Traffic Summary window is displayed when you select the Performance Data menu’s Port

Traffic Summary option in the Report Application window, as shown in Figure 9-8. You must select a

port type and plotting time interval, then click on the Plot button to have the statistical information

pertaining to the port traffic, plotted into graphs and displayed in the Report Application window.

Figure 9-8 Port Traffic Sum m ary Window

Required statistics for port traffic are described in T a ble 9-6. The report application retrieves all

instances of the statistics types within the selected plot period from the database and calculates the

following:

•

Percentage of bytes received from the network = (number of bits received per second / port speed)

* 100

•

Percentage of bytes transmitted to the network = (number of bits transmitted per second / port speed)

* 100

The following conversions are used to convert to bits per second:

•

Frame Relay ports bytes received to bits per second = (number of bytes received / (bucket interval

* 60)) * 8

ATM ports convert cells to bits per second: bps = (number of cells received / (bucket interval * 60))

* 48 * 8

Voice ports: bps = ((number of packets received / (bucket interval * 60)) * 24 *8

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Configuring Summary Reports

When the Include Peak Data button is enabled, the percent peak values of the total traffic transmitted

and received for a selected port are displayed along with the average values in the same graph. The

average raw counts are displayed in tabular form. The statistic types used to plot this report are based on

the port type. The Report Application retrieves peak instances (within the plot period) of all statistic

types from the database and calculates the following:

•

Peak number of bytes received from the network (in percentage of port speed) = (peak number of

bits received per second / port speed) * 100

•

Peak number of bytes transmitted to the network (in percentage of port speed) = (peak number of

bits transmitted per second / port speed) * 100

Table 9-6 Required Statistics for Port Traffic Sum m ary

Percentage Bytes Received

(Stats ID)

Percentage Bytes Transmitted

(Stats ID)

Port Type

Cisco IGX 8400 Frame Relay

(FRP, FRM, and UFM)

Number of Bytes Received (2)

Number of Bytes Transmitted (3)

Cisco BPX 8600 ATM

(ASI, BXM)

Number of Cells Received (7)

Number of Cells Transmitted

(11)

Cisco MGX 8220 Frame Relay Number of Bytes Received (2)

(FRSM)

Number of Bytes Transmitted (3)

Cisco MGX 8220 ATM (AUSM) Total Number of Cells Received Total Number of Cells

from Line (40)

Transmitted from Line (41)

Voice (UVM, CVM, CDP)

Number of Voice Packets

Received (61)

Number of Voice Packets

Transmitted (60)

Select Port for Report Pane

The Select Port for Report pane is comprised of the following components:

Clear Button

Filter Button

Click on this button to clear the Port Identifier pane and return to the default settings.

Click on this button to populate the Port Identifier pane with the ports matching the report filter options

you specified.

Port Type

A set of toggle buttons corresponding to the port types supported (Frame Relay, ATM, and Voice) are

displayed in this area. By default, all port types are selected.

Node Name

Specify the node name for the local end point in this field. Click on the “...” button to display the

Node:Shelf Selection window. Select the node name and corresponding shelf name from this window.

The default is all nodes (the field is blank).

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9 -2 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Configuring Summary Reports

Slot.Line

Specify the endpoint’s slot and line number in this field. The default is all slots (the field is blank).

Port List

This region is populated when you select the Filter button. All ports matching the filter criteria are

displayed in this region. You may select a single entry from the list for plotting.

Each entry in the list has the following format:

•

Port Identifier—the local and remote endpoints are displayed in this column. The format of the

endpoints is as follows: <nodename>.<slot>.<line>.<port>

•

Port Type—the type of the selected port is displayed in this column.

Port Speed—the port speed for the selected port is displayed in this column.

Report Type Pane

Include Peak Data

The Report Type pane is comprised of the following components:

When enabled peak performance is included in the graph along with the average performance data.

Peak Interval Option

Use this to select peak intervals from the values of 1, 5, 6, 10, 12, and 15 minutes if you have enabled

the Include Peak Data button. The default value is 5 minutes (300 seconds).

Note

You must select the same peak interval as the one enabled during statistics collection.

Plot Duration

Selections for time of day (TOD), previous hour (Prev Hour), previous day (Prev Day), and previous

week (Prev Week) are displayed. The default value is TOD.

When you select Prev Hour, Prev Day, or Prev Week, the Start Date/Start Time fields are inactive,

and when the Stop Date/Stop Time fields are blank, they are populated with the current date and time.

When you modify the stop date/time, the modified value is used for the plot duration. When you select

TOD, both Start Date/Start Time and Stop Date/End Time fields are activated, and the Stop

Date/End Time fields are populated with the current date and time.

Start Date/Start Time

Stop Date/End Time

Specify the start date and time for the graph in this field.

Specify the stop date and time for the graph in this field.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Summary Report and Wingz Report

Configuring Summary Reports

Cumulation Period

Click on the appropriate button (Hourly, Daily, or Weekly) to set the report’s plot interval. The default

selection is Hourly.

Result Pane

Plot Button

Status and error messages are displayed in this pane.

Click on this button to initiate the plotting of the report. When statistic entries are not found, an error

message is displayed in the Result pane. Otherwise, the Result pane displays the number of entries

found.

Cancel Button

Click on this button to cancel the current report filter operation and close this window.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

9 -2 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

Network Configurator

This chapter describes the CWM Network Configurator desktop application. The Network Configurator

is a new Java-based application for Release 10 of CWM that enables users to add new nodes, or modify

or delete existing nodes. It is also used to provide descriptor information, node name, and IP address

information for the nodes in your network.

Note

Every time a new session of the Network Configurator is started, you must edit the Topod.conf file

located in the /usr/users/svplus/config directory in order to disable automatic unique node ID

generation. The third line of Topod.conf describes the next line as the Auto Node Id Generation flag.

On line four, change the TRUE to FALSE to disable automatic node ID generation.

How to Start the Configurator

The Network Configurator is started by entering runConfigurator <machine name> <login>

<password> on a shell’s command line, where Cisco WAN Manager Release 10 is installed.

The Network Configurator main window appears, allowing the user to add, delete, and modify nodes.

Adding Nodes

To add a new node, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

To add a node, select Edit from the main menu bar of the Network Configurator window.

Select Node from the Edit menu.

Select Add from the Node menu.

A Node Dialog box appears after selecting Add from the Node menu. The Node Dialog box contains

two tab windows, Node and Other Info, in which the user enters information about the new node.

Step 5

Step 6

Step 7

In the Node window enter the new node name, the node Descriptor information, and FTP information,

in the appropriate fields.

In the Other Info window enter the mode, (Connected or Stand Alone), the MGX Model, the IP Address,

and any Parent Information, including Feeder Slot, Feeder Port, Parent Name, Parent Slot, and Port.

Press the OK button in the Node Dialog box.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

10 -1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Network Configurator

How to Start the Configurator

The Network Configurator validates the new node by ensuring its IP address and unique node name. The

node will be displayed in the Network Configurator main window if the node information is valid.

Step 8

Step 9

Select close from the Node Dialog pull down menu, located in the upper left hand corner of the window.

Select File, then Save from the Network Configurator Window.

Note

Changes made using the Network Configurator are not saved in the node_info table until you select

Save from the file menu. If the Cancel button is pressed, no changes will be made to the node_info

table.

Deleting Nodes

To delete a node, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Select the node to be deleted from the expanded node tree of the Network Configurator window.

Select Edit from the main menu bar of the Network Configurator window.

Select Node from the Edit menu.

Select Delete from the Node menu.

Select File, then Save from the Network Configurator window.

If the node has been successfully deleted, it will disappear from the Network Configurator main window.

Note

Only Stand Alone nodes can be deleted.

Modifying Nodes

To modify a node, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Select the node to be modified from the expanded node tree of the Network Configurator window.

Select Edit from the main menu bar of the Network Configurator window

Select Node from the Edit menu.

Select Modify from the Node menu.

A Node Dialog box appears after selecting Modify from the Node menu. The Node Dialog box contains

two tab windows, Node and , in which the user can modify information about the node.

Step 6

In the Node window, modifiable fields include SNMP community strings, FTP information, and Custom

information.

Step 7

Step 8

Step 9

In the Mode window there are no modifiable fields.

Press the OK button in the Node Dialog box.

Select close from the Node Dialog pull down menu, located in the upper left hand corner of the window.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

1 0 -2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Network Configurator

Community String Configuration

Step 10 Select File, then Save from the Network Configurator window.

Note

Changes made using the Network Configurator are not saved in the node_info table of the database until

you press the Save button. If the Exit button is pressed, no changes will be made to the node_info table.

The new node information is updated on the expanded node tree of the Network Configurator window.

Contents of the node_info table should only be displayed or edited through the Network Configurator.

Only one instance of the Network Configurator should be used at a time for performing an operation.

CWM provides tools that generate a unique node ID, but if multiple sessions of the Configurator are used

at the same time, problems will occur.

Community String Configuration

Release 10.4 of CWM allows the configuration of community strings for SNMP management. CWM

supports various multi-service-switching devices. Prior to the 10.4 release, CWM supported

configurable SNMP community string settings for MGX8850/R2 nodes only. The CWM application

Network Configurator is used to configure SNMP community strings from MGX8850/R2 devices. All

other devices use default SNMP community strings from the svplus.config file. For some devices such

as MGX8220 and MGX8850/R1 SNMP, the community strings are hard coded from the device side.

The community strings on the devices and the community strings used by CWM do not sync up

automatically (except at the initial stage when the community strings on the devices are at default). Users

have to explicitly change them on both sides (using the Network Configurator on CWM). If this is not

done, all SNMP requests (including RTM) will fail, and CWM’s database be inconsistent with the

network.

Note

The Runconfig does not require the CWM core to be running; it can be used when it is up and running

or when it’s down.

To Configure Community Strings:

Step 1

Change the community strings on the devices via CLI. You will need to telnet to the switch to configure

the community strings at the switches.

Step 2

Use the CWM Network Configurator to change the community strings, then choose Save from the

menu. After saving, the CWM processes use the new community strings for SNMP accesses. The

Primary CWM also sends the configured community strings to other Secondary CWMs through the

CWM Gateways.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

10 -3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Network Configurator

Community String Configuration

Since users have to configure the community strings on both the devices (via CLI), and at the CWM

stations (via Configurator), there is a possibility of typing in mismatched community strings. This would

result in the node with the mismatched community strings appearing to be un-reachable to CWM.

Note

Add, modify and delete can only be done from the Primary CWM.

Configured community strings cannot contain underscore ( _ ) or “at” signs (@). Also, spaces are not

allowed in community strings and ftp passwords.

Note

You must enter community strings on a Network Configurator that pertains to the database of a primary

CWM station.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

1 0 -4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

CWM to CWM Communications

Release 10 of Cisco WAN Manager has been designed to enable multiple CWM workstations to manage

a network with improved network synchronization and scalability. Due to the size and growth of

networks, it is faster to retrieve initial user data from another CWM workstation that is already running

and synchronized with the network. An industry standard CORBA architecture is used in Release 10 of

CWM to implement the communications between two or more CWM workstations. The architecture uses

a server-client structure for communications between the CWM server and client processes.

CWM workstations use CWM-CWM Communications to synchronize user data with each other. When

user data is provisioned or changed, the CWM workstations will propagate the new data to the other

CWM workstations. The user is able to continue the provisioning of network data, even when

communications between a Primary CWM and Secondary CWM have been interrupted. If for any reason

the communications between CWM servers are interrupted, the provisioning of the user data will be

suspended on the Secondary CWM, but not on the Primary CWM as user data provisioning will continue

on the Primary CWM. During that time, the provisioning of user data and monitoring of the network are

not impacted. This is called the Degraded Mode of Operation. This chapter introduces the CWM-CWM

Communications feature and also procedures for recovering from failures that may cause the CWM to

run in Degrade Mode.

Note

CWM to CWM Communications does not affect network sync-up.

CWM Domain

A CWM domain consists of all CWM workstations in a network that are in communication with each

other. Each CWM workstation functions as a CWM gateway, however one CWM workstation is

designated as the Primary CWM for keeping the user data, and is the source of all user data that the

Secondary CWMs can sync with.

You can define a CWM domain by specifying a list of CWM workstations that will communicate with

each other, as described in this chapter under “Configuring CWM to CWM Communications”. All CWM

workstations in a given domain must be connected to the same set of networks to ensure that their

databases remain consistent.

Note

The network.conf file does not have to be the same on all CWM stations in the domain as long as the

gateway nodes specified in this file are part of the same network. Even though CWMs that manage the

same network can talk to each other, managing the same network does not require having identical

network.conf files on all Secondary and Primary CWMs.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

11 -1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 11 CWM to CWM Communications

CWMGateway Process

The CWMGateway process provides a communications gateway for CMW workstations. Processes

owned by one CWM workstation can communicate with processes owned by another CWM workstation

using the CWMGateway process.

CWM workstations within the same CWM domain communicate with other CWM workstations by

transferring information between the CWMGateway processes of each CWM workstation. The

communication between CWM workstations is set up transparently by the CWMGateway processes in

each CWM workstation.

CWM core processes communicate with the CWMGateway process of the CWM workstation to request

information from and to send information to another CWM workstation.

CWMGateway Functionality

With the use of the CWMGateway Process, CWM to CWM communications allows CWM to have the

following functionality:

•

CWM can determine, without the help of the managed network, the presence of other managing

CWM servers. This is achieved by having IP connectivity between all CWM workstations.

Note

Loss of IP connectivity means that the Primary and Secondary CWMs are not able to communicate

through sending or receiving network information, and are not able to ping each other.

•

CWM workstations can communicate with other (remote) CWM workstations.

If a Primary CWM workstation were to be shut down, another CWM workstation would become the

new Primary CWM.

•

If failure occurs, such as a loss of communication, it can be detected and recovered predictably and

reliably.

Apart from the redundancy aspect, one additional benefit of the CWM gateway is the ability for multiple

CWM workstations to share User Data, as well as maintain synchronization with the network. The CWM

Gateway process maintains consistency of user data across the CWM domain, while the proprietary

Robust Trap mechanism and SNMP maintain the CWM database consistent with the network data.

Network Data is defined as data that originates in the network and is communicated to the CWM

workstation(s) by means of the proprietary Robust Trap mechanism or by SNMP, depending on the

network element concerned. An example of network data is a change in alarm status for a user port or

access line.

User Data is information that is supplied by a CWM user, or by an external OSS, and which cannot be

stored in a network element and was therefore not visible to other CWM workstations prior to Release

10. Examples of User Data include connection templates, Service Class Templates, SNMP community

strings, and the unique node IDs generated by CWM during the network discovery process.

With the CWM gateway function, User Data is propagated between the CWM workstations in a domain,

thereby maintaining consistency. The Primary CWM acts as an arbitrator to prevent contention between

CWM workstations for the same element of User Data. This means, for example, that if a user on one

CWM workstation wants to modify a particular connection template, the Connection Template Manager

process on that CWM workstation must request the Primary CWM workstation to lock that resource to

prevent concurrent modification by two users.

Cisco WAN Manager User’s Guide

Version 10.5, Part Number 78-12945-01 Rev. D0, August 2003

1 1 -2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 11 CWM to CWM Communications

Establishing Primary CWM and Secondary CWM Priority